NetEngine 8000 F2A Hardware Guide (V800R021C00 to V800R023C00) (pdf)

HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
V800R021C00 to V800R023C00
Hardware Guide


Issue 04
Date 2025-04-30


HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2025. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees
or representations of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.


Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: https://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide Contents


Contents


1 Document Declaration........................................................................................................... 1
2 Using the Hardware Tool.......................................................................................................4
3 Hardware Description.............................................................................................................5
3.1 Chassis......................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
3.1.1 NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H............................................................................................................................................ 5
3.2 Power........................................................................................................................................................................................ 30
3.2.1 NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H Power Module............................................................................................................30
3.2.1.1 PAC3KS54-DB (AC&240VDC PSU,PAC3KS54-DB,3000W AC 240V DC Power Module (Back to
Front,Power panel side exhaust)).......................................................................................................................................... 30
3.2.1.2 PAC3KS54-DF (AC&240VDC PSU,PAC3KS54-DF,2500W/3000W AC&240VDC Power Module (Front
to Back, Power panel side intake))........................................................................................................................................ 33
3.2.1.3 PDC2K2S54-CB (DC Power Module,PDC2K2S54-CB,2200W DC Power Module(Back to Front ,
Power panel side exhaust))...................................................................................................................................................... 37
3.2.1.4 PDC2K2S54-CF (DC Power Module,PDC2K2S54-CF,2200W DC Power Module(Front to Back, Power
panel side intake)).......................................................................................................................................................................40
3.3 Fan............................................................................................................................................................................................. 43
3.3.1 NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H Fan Module................................................................................................................. 44
3.3.1.1 FAN-180D-B (Fan box(B,FAN panel side exhaust))........................................................................................... 44
3.3.1.2 FAN-180D-F (Fan box(F,FAN panel side intake )).............................................................................................. 46
3.4 Optical Module...................................................................................................................................................................... 48
3.4.1 Understanding Pluggable Optical Modules............................................................................................................. 48
3.4.1.1 Appearance and Structure.......................................................................................................................................... 48
3.4.1.2 Types of Optical Modules............................................................................................................................................49
3.4.1.3 Instruction.........................................................................................................................................................................51
3.4.1.4 Instructions on How to Use an Optical Module..................................................................................................56
3.4.1.5 Configuring an Optical Attenuator.......................................................................................................................... 67
3.4.2 OA Overview....................................................................................................................................................................... 68
3.4.2.1 Functions........................................................................................................................................................................... 68
3.4.2.2 Appearance and Structure.......................................................................................................................................... 69
3.4.2.3 Usage Scenarios..............................................................................................................................................................70
3.4.2.4 Guide to Using OAs....................................................................................................................................................... 72
3.4.3 40Gbps QSFP+ Optical Module.................................................................................................................................... 75
3.4.3.1 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1271~1331nm-10km-commercial.................................................................. 75

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide Contents

3.4.3.2 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial...............................................................................77
3.4.3.3 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial...............................................................................78
3.4.4 50Gbps QSFP28 Optical Module..................................................................................................................................79
3.4.4.1 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-10km-commercial............................................................................................ 79
3.4.4.2 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-40km-commercial............................................................................................ 81
3.4.4.3 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1300.05nm-80km-commercial.................................................................... 82
3.4.5 50Gbps QSFP28 BIDI Optical Module........................................................................................................................ 84
3.4.5.1 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1331nm(Tx)/1271nm(Rx)-10km-commercial.......................................................... 84
3.4.5.2 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1271nm(Tx)/1331nm(Rx)-10km-commercial.......................................................... 86
3.4.5.3 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1295nm(Tx)/1309nm(Rx)-40km-commercial.......................................................... 87
3.4.5.4 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1309nm(Tx)/1295nm(Rx)-40km-commercial.......................................................... 89
3.4.6 100Gbps QSFP28 Optical Module............................................................................................................................... 91
3.4.6.1 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial..........................................................................91
3.4.6.2 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1271~1331nm-2km-commercial................................................................ 93
3.4.6.3 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1310nm-30km(NO FEC)-40km(FEC)-commercial............................... 94
3.4.6.4 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-commercial (02312BSS)..........................96
3.4.6.5 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-80km-commercial.................................................. 98
3.4.6.6 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-40km-commercial.................................................. 99
3.4.6.7 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-commercial (02313SWA)..................... 101
3.4.6.8 100Gbps-QSFP28-1310nm-10km-commercial..................................................................................................103
3.4.7 400Gbps QSFP-DD Optical Module.......................................................................................................................... 104
3.4.7.1 400Gbps(8*56Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial..................................................104
3.4.7.2 400Gbps(8*56Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial..................................................106
3.4.7.3 400Gbps-QSFP-DD-SMF-1528.773~1567.133nm-commercial.................................................................... 108
3.4.7.4 400Gbps(4*100Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-SMF-1310nm-2km-commercial..................................................110
3.4.7.5 400Gbps(8*50Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial..................................................112
3.4.7.6 400Gbps-QSFP-DD-SMF-1547nm-80km-commercial.................................................................................... 114
3.4.7.7 400Gbps(4*100Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-SMF-1310nm-6km-commercial..................................................116
3.4.7.8 High Speed Transceiver,QSFP-DD,Tunable C-band 191.3-196.1THz,478.75Gb/
s,-10dBm,-6dBm,-12dBm,LC,SMF.........................................................................................................................................118
3.4.7.9 400G Transceiver,QSFP-DD,Tunable C-band 191.3-196.1THz,478.75Gb/
s,0dBm,4dBm,-20dBm,LC,ITU-T G.652(SMF)....................................................................................................................121
3.4.8 Optical Amplifier Module.............................................................................................................................................125
3.4.8.1 Optical Amplifier-QSFP28-SMF-1535nm~1547nm..........................................................................................125
3.5 Cables..................................................................................................................................................................................... 126
3.5.1 NetEngine 8000 F2A Power Cable............................................................................................................................ 126
3.5.1.1 DC Power Cable........................................................................................................................................................... 127
3.5.1.2 AC Power Cable............................................................................................................................................................ 131
3.5.2 Chassis Ground Cable.................................................................................................................................................... 134
3.5.3 Standard Serial Cable.................................................................................................................................................... 135
3.5.4 USB-to-Serial Cable........................................................................................................................................................ 137
3.5.5 Clock Cable (External Clock Mode, Delivery-Ready).......................................................................................... 138
3.5.6 Clock Cable (External Clock/External Time Mode, Prepared Onsite)........................................................... 140

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide Contents

3.5.7 Clock Bridging Cable...................................................................................................................................................... 142
3.5.8 Ethernet Cable..................................................................................................................................................................144
3.5.9 Fiber Jumpers................................................................................................................................................................... 147
3.6 Fiber Breakout..................................................................................................................................................................... 153
3.6.1 Breakout Fibers................................................................................................................................................................ 153
3.6.2 Breakout Boxes................................................................................................................................................................ 158
3.6.2.1 Product Overview........................................................................................................................................................ 158
3.6.2.2 10-Port-MPO-12-40-Port-LC-Breakout Box(single-mode)............................................................................159
4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement............................................................163
4.1 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide of NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H.........................................163
4.1.1 Hardware Installation and Usage Precautions..................................................................................................... 163
4.1.2 A610 Cabinet Installation.............................................................................................................................................166
4.1.2.1 Introduction to the A610 Cabinet.......................................................................................................................... 166
4.1.2.2 Cabinet Accessories.....................................................................................................................................................172
4.1.2.2.1 (Optional) Cabinet Stand...................................................................................................................................... 172
4.1.2.3 Cabinet Installation.....................................................................................................................................................174
4.1.2.3.1 Installing Cabinets on an ESD Floor.................................................................................................................. 174
4.1.2.3.2 Installing Cabinets on a Concrete Floor........................................................................................................... 195
4.1.2.4 Connecting PGND Cables......................................................................................................................................... 214
4.1.3 Device Installation Process.......................................................................................................................................... 216
4.1.4 Preparation before the installtion............................................................................................................................. 217
4.1.4.1 Reading Carefully the Safety Precautions........................................................................................................... 217
4.1.4.2 Checking the Installation Site..................................................................................................................................219
4.1.4.3 Checking the Cabinet................................................................................................................................................. 220
4.1.4.4 Preparing Installation Tools and Accessories..................................................................................................... 223
4.1.4.5 Inspecting and Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors and Adapters.............................................................. 228
4.1.4.5.1 Overview..................................................................................................................................................................... 228
4.1.4.5.2 Protection of Optical Fiber Connectors............................................................................................................ 230
4.1.4.5.3 Tools, Equipment, and Materials........................................................................................................................ 231
4.1.4.5.4 Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors..................................................................................................................232
4.1.4.5.5 Inspecting the Optical Fiber Link........................................................................................................................235
4.1.4.5.6 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using the Cassette Cleaner.............................................................. 237
4.1.4.5.7 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue................................................................................ 240
4.1.4.5.8 Cleaning Optical Fiber Adapters Using Dustfree Absorbent Swabs....................................................... 242
4.1.4.6 Inspection of Power Distribution Environment................................................................................................. 244
4.1.4.6.1 Introduction to the Power Distribution System.............................................................................................244
4.1.4.6.2 DC Power Distribution............................................................................................................................................ 245
4.1.4.6.3 AC Power Distribution............................................................................................................................................ 247
4.1.4.7 Unpacking a Device.................................................................................................................................................... 250
4.1.5 Installing a chassis in a Cabinet.................................................................................................................................251
4.1.6 Cable Routing Planning................................................................................................................................................ 254
4.1.7 Installation of cables......................................................................................................................................................255

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide Contents

4.1.7.1 Installing Optical Fibers.............................................................................................................................................255
4.1.7.2 Installing Network Cables.........................................................................................................................................257
4.1.7.3 Installing a Cabinet Ground Cable.........................................................................................................................258
4.1.8 Post-Installation Check................................................................................................................................................. 260
4.1.9 Power-on Check............................................................................................................................................................... 263
4.1.10 (Optional) Checking Optical Power....................................................................................................................... 265
4.1.11 Maintenance of the device........................................................................................................................................ 267
4.1.11.1 Basic Operation Process and Precautions......................................................................................................... 267
4.1.11.2 Replacing a power module.................................................................................................................................... 270
4.1.11.2.1 Replacing the DC Power Module..................................................................................................................... 270
4.1.11.2.2 Replacing the AC Power Module......................................................................................................................272
4.1.11.3 Replacing the Fan Module..................................................................................................................................... 273
4.1.11.4 Replacing an Optical Module............................................................................................................................... 275
4.1.11.5 Replacing an Optical Cable................................................................................................................................... 280
4.1.11.6 Replacing a Network Cable................................................................................................................................... 282
4.1.12 Appendix.......................................................................................................................................................................... 284
4.1.12.1 Environmental Requirements for Device Operation..................................................................................... 284
4.1.12.1.1 Environmental Requirements for Equipment Room..................................................................................284
4.1.12.1.2 Requirements for Power Supply....................................................................................................................... 292
4.1.12.2 On-site Cable Assembly and Installation.......................................................................................................... 293
4.1.12.2.1 Cable Assembly Precautions.............................................................................................................................. 293
4.1.12.2.2 Assembling Power Cables................................................................................................................................... 294
4.1.12.2.3 Assembling Ethernet Cables.............................................................................................................................. 310
4.1.12.2.4 Installing Cable Accessories............................................................................................................................... 324
4.1.12.2.5 Installing Ethernet Adapters.............................................................................................................................. 328
4.1.12.2.6 Installing Fiber Connectors.................................................................................................................................331
4.1.12.2.7 Replacing the Mold of the Crimping Tool..................................................................................................... 338
4.1.12.3 Equipment Grounding Specifications................................................................................................................. 341
4.1.12.3.1 General Grounding Specifications....................................................................................................................341
4.1.12.3.2 Grounding Specifications for Equipment Room.......................................................................................... 342
4.1.12.3.3 Grounding Specifications for Devices............................................................................................................. 342
4.1.12.3.4 Grounding Specifications for Communications Power Supply............................................................... 343
4.1.12.3.5 Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables.................................................................................................. 343
4.1.12.3.6 Specifications for Laying Out Grounding Cables........................................................................................ 344
4.1.12.4 Engineering Labels for Cables...............................................................................................................................344
4.1.12.4.1 Introduction to Labels.......................................................................................................................................... 345
4.1.12.4.2 Engineering Labels for Optical Fibers.............................................................................................................352
4.1.12.4.3 Engineering Labels for Network Cables.........................................................................................................354
4.1.12.4.4 Engineering Labels for User Cables................................................................................................................. 356
4.1.12.4.5 Engineering Labels for Power Cables..............................................................................................................357


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 1 Document Declaration


1 Document Declaration

Purpose
This document describes hardware features of the NetEngine 8000 F2A. It helps
intended readers obtain detailed information about each chassis, board, and cable,
and learn how to install and maintain devices.


NO TICE

The Hardware Guide includes hardware data of multiple versions. Before using this
document, check the first version supported by the hardware.

Related Version


NO TICE

The following table lists the product versions involved in this document. Before
reading this document, confirm whether your versions are included in this
document.

Product Name Version

HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Applicable to:
● V800R021C00SPC100
● V800R021C10SPC600
● V800R022C00SPC600
● V800R022C10SPC500
● V800R023C00SPC500


Intended Audience
This document is intended for:

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 1 Document Declaration

● Network planning engineers
● Hardware installation engineers
● Commissioning engineers
● On-site maintenance engineers
● System maintenance engineers

Special Declaration
● The pictures of hardware in this document are for reference only.
● The supported boards are described in the document. Whether a
customization requirement can be met is subject to the information provided
at the pre-sales interface.
● All device dimensions described in this document are designed dimensions
and do not include dimension tolerances. In the process of component
manufacturing, the actual size is deviated due to factors such as processing or
measurement.

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if
not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk
which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if
not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, could result in equipment damage,
data loss, performance deterioration, or
unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to
personal injury.

Supplements the important information in the main
text.
NOTE is used to address information not related to
personal injury, equipment damage, and
environment deterioration.



Change History
● Changes in Issue 04 (2025-04-30)

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 1 Document Declaration

This is the fourth official release.
● Changes in Issue 03 (2024-12-31)
This is the third official release.
● Changes in Issue 02 (2024-08-30)
This is the second official release.
● Changes in Issue 01 (2024-06-30)
This is the first official release.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 2 Using the Hardware Tool


2 Using the Hardware Tool

Enterprise:
In the enterprise network market, Info-Finder is a tool platform, It allows you to
search for key product information by product series and model. The key product
information includes basic information such as the software specifications, life
cycles, and hardware information, and operation and maintenance information
such as the licenses, alarms, logs, commands, and MIBs. The hardware-related
tools are as follows:
● Product image gallery: provides product photos, and network element icons
for you to produce design drawings and networking diagrams.
● Hardware configuration: automatically generates hardware configuration
diagrams after you select components are required and calculates the weight,
power consumption, and heat consumption.
● Hardware center: provides the technical specifications of devices and
components, as well as the mapping between devices, components, and
versions.
● 3D model: Using this function, you can query product images, product
overview, and component insertion/removal videos, enabling you to quickly
obtain product information in one-stop mode.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description


3 Hardware Description


3.1 Chassis
3.2 Power
3.3 Fan
3.4 Optical Module
3.5 Cables
3.6 Fiber Breakout

3.1 Chassis

3.1.1 NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Overview

Table 3-1 Basic information about the NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H
Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02354GTC CR8P0BKP0 V800R021C Y When
8000 3C0 00SPC100 400G ZR+
F2A-8K36H optical
Integrated modules
Chassis are
Componen installed
ts(Port-side on
Intake) interfaces
20 to 27,
the high-
temperatur
e
specificatio
n decreases
to 37°C
(99°F).

NetEngine 02354GTD CR8P0BKP0 V800R021C Y -
8000 3C1 00SPC100
F2A-8K36H
Integrated
Chassis
Componen
ts(Port-side
Exhaust)


Appearance

Figure 3-1 Appearance of the NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H (port side)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-2 Appearance of the NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H (power side)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

NO TE

Figures in the document are for reference only, and the actual appearance of the devices
may vary depending on the exact device model.
A chassis that adopts port-side air intake can house only power modules and fan modules
with the same air intake mode.
Similarly, a chassis that adopts port-side air exhaust can house only power modules and fan
modules with the same air exhaust mode.

Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

Slot Layout

Figure 3-3 Slot Layout of the NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H


Table 3-2 Slots on the NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H

Slot Type Slot ID Slot Direction Remarks

IPU 1 - Fixed ports

POWER 2 - Power supply

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Slot Type Slot ID Slot Direction Remarks

POWER 3 - Power supply

FAN 4 - Fan

FAN 5 - Fan

FAN 6 - Fan




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Panel

Figure 3-4 Panel on the NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

1. Status 2. Port status 3. Breakout channel 4. Port status
indicator(STAT) indicator(0~6 indicator(BREAKOUT( indicator(GE0,G
3) 0~3)) E1)

5. Management 6. Reset 7. Port status -
port status button(RST) indicator(HP-GE)
indicator(L/A)


Table 3-3 Indicators on the NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Status Green Steady on The device is
indicator working
properly.

Red Steady on An alarm is
generated.

Green Blinking The card is
being
registered.

Orange Blinking The password
and
configuration
on the card
are being
cleared.

- Off The system is
not powered
on or
registered.

L/A (MGMT- Management Green Steady on The link is up.
ETH) Ethernet port
status Green Blinking Data is being
indicator transmitted or
received.

- Off The link is
down.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

BREAKOUT Breakout Green Blinking Each
(0–3) channel BREAKOUT
indicator indicator for
channels 0 to
3 is on for 5s
in sequence
to indicate
the status of
the
corresponding
channel, and
this process
repeats.

- Off No data is
being
transmitted or
received over
this channel.

GE0, GE1 Port status Green Steady on The link is up.
indicator
Green Blinking Data is being
transmitted or
received.

- Off The link is
down.

HP-GE Green Steady on The link is up.

Green Blinking Data is being
transmitted or
received.

- Off The link is
down.

0–63 Green Steady on The link is up.

Green Blinking Data is being
transmitted or
received.

- Off The link is
down.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-4 Buttons on the NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H
Silkscreen Name Description

RST Reset button You can press the RST
button to reset the NE or
restore the factory
defaults of the NE.
The procedure is as
follows:
To reset the NE, press
the RST button and
release it.
To restore factory
settings, press and hold
the RST button. This
operation will clear the
NE database and system
parameter configurations
and cannot be restored.
Exercise caution when
you perform the
following operations:
1. Press and release the
RST button to restart the
NE.
2. When the STAT
indicator blinks green
(the blinking frequency
is about 250 ms and the
time window is about 15
seconds), press and hold
the RST button.
3. Wait for no longer
than 2 minutes till the
STAT indicators blink
orange (the time
window is 5 seconds).
Then release the RST
button immediately.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Description

NOTE
1. When you press the RST
button to clear the
configuration file, the
original configuration file
will be cleared. You are
advised to periodically
back up the configuration
file.
2. When pressing the RST
button to clear the
configuration file, you only
need to pay attention to
the STAT indicator. Other
indicators may vary
depending on the product
model.



Table 3-5 Ports on the NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

0–19 QSFP28 Port for inputting 100Gbps QSFP28
and outputting Optical Module
100GE/50GE/ 50Gbps QSFP28
40GE optical Optical Module
signals
50Gbps QSFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
40Gbps QSFP+
Optical Module


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

20–27 QSFPDD Port for inputting 400Gbps QSFP-
and outputting DD Optical
400GE/100GE/ Module
50GE/40GE 100Gbps QSFP28
optical signals Optical Module
NOTE 50Gbps QSFP28
1. Port 20 shares
400G bandwidth Optical Module
with ports 8, 9, 50Gbps QSFP28
and 12. Port 21 BIDI Optical
shares 400G
Module
bandwidth with
ports 10, 11, and 40Gbps QSFP+
14. Port 22 shares Optical Module
400G bandwidth
with ports 13, 16, NOTE
and 17. Port 23 1. The device that
shares 400G uses port-side air
bandwidth with exhaust for heat
ports 15, 18, and dissipation does
19. not support 400
Gbps ER/ZR/ZR+
2. Port 24 shares optical modules.
400G bandwidth
with ports 28 and 2. Some ports on
29. Port 25 shares devices with port-
400G bandwidth side air intake for
with ports 30 and heat dissipation
31. Port 26 shares support 400 Gbps
400G bandwidth ZR+ optical
with ports 32 and modules. For
33. Port 27 shares details about the
400G bandwidth usage rules and
with ports 34 and limitations, see the
35. Remarks field on
the Interface sheet.
3. Ports 20–25 When such an
support FlexE. optical module is
used, the ambient
temperature
cannot be higher
than 37°C.
3. When 400 Gbps
ZR/ZR+ optical
modules are used,
they must work
with optical
amplifiers.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

28–63 QSFP28 100GE/50GE/ 100Gbps QSFP28
40GE optical Optical Module
signal input and 50Gbps QSFP28
output ports. Optical Module
NOTE 50Gbps QSFP28
Ports 36 to 51
support 4x25G and BIDI Optical
4x10G breakout Module
optical modules 40Gbps QSFP+
Optical Module

GE0/GE1 SFP Cascading port Reserved
used for control
panel expansion
in scenarios like
virtual cluster
(reserved)

HP-GE SFP High-precision Reserved
clock port
(reserved)

MGMT-ETH RJ45 Port for Category 5
connecting to the enhanced
NMS workstation shielded twisted
pairs

Console/AUX RJ45 Port for 8-core shielded
hybrid interface connecting to the cable
console for onsite
system
configuration. The
default baud rate
is 9600 bit/s.
(AUX hybrid
interface
reserved)

TOD clock RJ45 Port for inputting 120-ohm clock
interface and outputting cable
one-channel 1PPS
+TOD time signals
or one-channel
DCLS signals

CLK RJ45 Port for inputting 120-ohm clock
and outputting 2 cable
Mbit/s or 2 MHz
clock signals

USB Type A USB port Reserved
(reserved)

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description


Interface Numbering Rules
On the NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H, an interface is numbered in the format of
"slot number/subcard number/port number". The following part describes the
details:
● Slot number
The slot number of NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H is always 0.
● Subcard number
The NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H does not support subcards. Therefore, the
subcard number of the 8000 F2A-8K36H is fixed as 1.
● Port number
The port numbers of service interfaces on the NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H
begin with 0. Port numbering depends on the number of interfaces on the
NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H.

Ports

Table 3-6 Port description
Port Number Port Type

0 to 19, 28 to 63 100GE/50GE/40GE

20 to 27 400GE/100GE/50GE/40GE


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Port Number Port Type

NOTE
1. Port 20 shares 400G bandwidth with ports 8, 9, and 12. Port 21 shares 400G bandwidth
with ports 10, 11, and 14. Port 22 shares 400G bandwidth with ports 13, 16, and 17.
Port 23 shares 400G bandwidth with ports 15, 18, and 19. As (1) shown in Port
description. For details about how to configure different bandwidth modes, see the
NetEngine 8000 F2A V800R023C00SPC500 Product Documentation Configuring a
Bandwidth Mode for an Interface.
2. Port 24 shares 400G bandwidth with ports 28 and 29. Port 25 shares 400G bandwidth
with ports 30 and 31. Port 26 shares 400G bandwidth with ports 32 and 33. Port 27
shares 400G bandwidth with ports 34 and 35. As (2) shown in Port description. For
details about how to configure different bandwidth modes, see the NetEngine 8000 F2A
V800R023C00SPC500 Product Documentation Configuring a Bandwidth Mode for an
Interface.
3. Ports 36-51 support 4*25G and 4*10G breakout.
4. When ports 20 to 25 are configured to work at 400 Gbit/s can support FlexE, but cannot
support FlexE bonding.
5. When port 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, or 25 is configured to work at 50 Gbit/s or 100 Gbit/s, it
still supports FlexE, and ports in the same group support FlexE bonding if these ports
work at the same speed. The supported port groups are {20, 8, 9, and 12}, {21, 10, 11,
and 14}, {22, 13, 16, and 17}, {23, 15, 18, and 19}, {24, 28, and 29}, and {25, 30, and
31}.
6. Only ports 26, 27, 23, and 24 support 400 Gbps ZR+ optical modules. Installing 400
Gbps ZR+ optical modules in ports 26 and 27 is recommended. If port 23 uses a 400
Gbps ZR+ optical module, port 22 can use only a 100 Gbps optical module. If port 24
uses a 400 Gbps ZR+ optical module, port 25 can use only a 100 Gbps optical module.
When a 400 Gbps ZR+ module is used, ensure that the ambient temperature does not
exceed 37°C.


Figure 3-5 Port description


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Labels

Figure 3-6 Label position


Table 3-7 Label description
Figure Label Name Description

Chassis bar The bar code will be retrieved by the device as
code label the equipment serial number (ESN).

Warning and Do not touch the fan when the fan is rotating.
caution

Do not use this handle to lift the device. May
result in injury or equipment damage.

This device has more than one power input.
Disconnect all power inputs to power off this
device.

High touch current, earth connection essential
before connecting supply.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure Label Name Description

Product The label suggests the product name,
nameplate certification and qualification.
label


Power Supply System
The system supports DC and AC power supply in 1+1 backup mode.
The power supply system provides the fault monitoring and alarming function.
The two power modules work in 1+1 backup mode. The two power supply
channels in backup mode are converted by two independent power supply
modules and then provided for Control board and fans.

Figure 3-7 Power supply architecture


Heat Dissipation System
The system air channel allows air to flow from front to back or from back to front.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-8 Front to back (NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H)


Figure 3-9 Back to front (NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-8 Technical specifications of the CR8P0BKP03C0
Item Specification

Cabinet installation standards ● It can be installed in a standard 19-
inch cabinet. A 1000 mm deep
cabinet is recommended.
● By default, a Huawei A610 cabinet
with a depth of 1000 mm and a
height of 2200 mm is installed. The
part number of the cabinet is
02115970 (CR5BRACK2205).
● Using a Huawei cabinet is
recommended. If a third-party
cabinet is used, the front door of
the cabinet must be equipped with
an air filter, and the rear door must
not be equipped with any air filter
(if there is one, remove it).

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 86.1 mm x 442 mm x 600 mm (3.39 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 17.40 in. x 23.62 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 280 mm x 660 mm x 875 mm (11.02
D) [mm(in.)] in. x 25.98 in. x 34.45 in.)

Chassis height [U] 2 U

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 18 kg (39.68 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 26.2 kg (57.76 lb)

Weight without packaging (full DC: 21 kg (46.3 lb)
configuration) [kg(lb)] AC: 20.5 kg (45.19 lb)

Weight with packaging (full DC: 31.5 kg (69.45 lb)
configuration) [kg(lb)] AC: 30 kg (66.14 lb)

Typical power consumption (with 1100 W
configuration) [W]

Typical heat dissipation (with 3574 BTU/hour
configuration) [BTU/hour]

MTBF [year] DC: 25.52
AC: 25.65

MTTR [hour] 0.5 hour

Availability 0.99999

CPU 8-core 2.3 GHz


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 22
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Memory 16 GB

Flash memory 64 MB

Storage 8 GB

Power supply mode ● DC
● AC/HVDC

Maximum number of power chassis 2
inputs

Rated input voltage [V] DC: –48 V to –60 V
AC: 100 V to 130 V (dual-live
wire)/200 V to 240 V
HVDC: 190 V–240 V

Input voltage range [V] DC: –40 V to –72 V
AC: 90 V–290 V
HVDC: 190 V–290 V

Maximum input current [A] DC: 50A
AC/HVDC: 16A

Rated output power [W] DC: 2200 W
AC: 3000 W (input: 200 V AC to 290 V
AC/200 V DC to 290 V DC)
2800 W (input: 176 V AC to 200 V
AC/190 V DC to 200 V DC)

Maximum input cable size [mm²] DC: 25 mm²
AC/HVDC: 2.5 mm²

Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] DC : ≥ 50
AC : ≥ 16

Types of fans Pluggable

Heat dissipation mode Air cooling

Airflow direction Front-to-rear airflow model: port-side
intake

Noise at normal temperature (acoustic < 78 dBA
power) [dB(A)]

Number of slots 6

Number of service board slots 1

Switching capacity 13.6 Tbit/s


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Maximum number of physical ports on 64
the entire device

Maximum number of 400GE ports 8

Maximum number of 100GE ports 64

Maximum number of 50GE ports 64

Maximum number of 40GE ports 64

Redundant power supply 1+1

Redundant fans 2+1, normal operation at 40°C (104°F)
for a short term after a fan fails

Long-term operating temperature Front-to-rear model: –5°C to +45°C
[°C(°F)] (23°F to 113°F)

Restriction on the operating ≤ 0.5°C/min (32.9°F/min), non-
temperature variation rate [°C(°F)] condensing

Storage temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158 °F)

Long-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing
[RH]

Short-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing
[RH]

Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing

Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] ≤ 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) (For the
altitude in the range of 1800 m to
4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
operating temperature of the device
must decrease by 1°C [1.8°F] for every
220 m [721.78 ft.].)

Storage altitude [m(ft.)] < 5000 m (16404.2 ft.)

Breakout supported Yes

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Yes


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

FlexE supported Yes
Physical ports 20, 8, 9, and 12 can be
added to the same group. port-id
ranges from 1000 to 3000. A
maximum of 36 FlexE clients can be
created.
Physical ports 21, 10, 11, and 14 can
be added to the same group. port-id
ranges from 1000 to 3000. A
maximum of 36 FlexE clients can be
created.
Physical ports 22, 13, 16, and 17 can
be added to the same group. port-id
ranges from 1000 to 3000. A
maximum of 36 FlexE clients can be
created.
Physical ports 23, 15, 18, and 19 can
be added to the same group. port-id
ranges from 1000 to 3000. A
maximum of 36 FlexE clients can be
created.
Physical ports 24, 28, and 29 can be
added to the same group. port-id
ranges from 1000 to 3000. A
maximum of 36 FlexE clients can be
created.
Physical ports 25, 30, 31 can be added
to the same group. port-id ranges from
1000 to 3000. A maximum of 36 FlexE
clients can be created.

RTU supported Yes
Ports 20 to 27: These ports work at a
rate of 100 Gbit/s by default. To use
higher port bandwidth, load the
corresponding RTU license.
Ports 0 to 19 and 28 to 63: These ports
are limited to a bandwidth of 100
Mbit/s by default. To change the port
bandwidth mode, load the
corresponding RTU license.
To check the list of RTU licenses
supported by the device and the
loading method, use the License Query
tool or see the related license usage
guide.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-9 Technical specifications of the CR8P0BKP03C1
Item Specification

Cabinet installation standards ● It can be installed in a standard 19-
inch cabinet. A 1000 mm deep
cabinet is recommended.
● By default, a Huawei A610 cabinet
with a depth of 1000 mm and a
height of 2200 mm is installed. The
part number of the cabinet is
02115970 (CR5BRACK2205).
● Using a Huawei cabinet is
recommended. If a third-party
cabinet is used, the front door of
the cabinet must be equipped with
an air filter, and the rear door must
not be equipped with any air filter
(if there is one, remove it).

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 86.1 mm x 442 mm x 600 mm (3.39 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 17.40 in. x 23.62 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 280 mm x 660 mm x 875 mm (11.02
D) [mm(in.)] in. x 25.98 in. x 34.45 in.)

Chassis height [U] 2 U

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 18 kg (39.68 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 26.2 kg (57.76 lb)

Weight without packaging (full DC: 21 kg (46.3 lb)
configuration) [kg(lb)] AC: 20.5 kg (45.19 lb)

Weight with packaging (full DC: 31.5 kg (69.45 lb)
configuration) [kg(lb)] AC: 30 kg (66.14 lb)

Typical power consumption (with 1100 W
configuration) [W]

Typical heat dissipation (with 3574 BTU/hour
configuration) [BTU/hour]

MTBF [year] DC: 25.52
AC: 25.65

MTTR [hour] 0.5 hour

Availability 0.99999

CPU 8-core 2.3 GHz

Memory 16 GB

Flash memory 64 MB


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Storage 8 GB

Power supply mode ● DC
● AC/HVDC

Maximum number of power chassis 2
inputs

Rated input voltage [V] DC: –48 V to –60 V
AC: 100 V to 130 V (dual-live
wire)/200 V to 240 V
HVDC: 190 V–240 V

Input voltage range [V] DC: –40V to–72V
AC: 90V–290V
HVDC: 190V–290V

Maximum input current [A] DC: 50A
AC/HVDC: 16A

Rated output power [W] DC: 2200 W
AC: 3000 W (input: 200 V AC to 290 V
AC/200 V DC to 290 V DC)
2800 W (input: 176 V AC to 200 V
AC/190 V DC to 200 V DC)

Maximum input cable size [mm²] DC: 25 mm²
AC/HVDC: 2.5 mm²

Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] DC : ≥ 50
AC : ≥ 16

Types of fans Pluggable

Heat dissipation mode Air cooling

Airflow direction Back to front: port-side air exhaust

Noise at normal temperature (acoustic < 78 dBA
power) [dB(A)]

Number of slots 6

Number of service board slots 1

Switching capacity 13.6 Tbit/s

Maximum number of physical ports on 64
the entire device

Maximum number of 400GE ports 8

Maximum number of 100GE ports 64

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 27
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Maximum number of 50GE ports 64

Maximum number of 40GE ports 64

Redundant power supply 1+1

Redundant fans 2+1, normal operation at 40°C (104°F)
for a short term after a fan fails

Long-term operating temperature Rear-in front-out model: 0°C to 40°C
[°C(°F)] (32°F to 104°F)

Restriction on the operating ≤ 0.5°C/min (32.9°F/min), non-
temperature variation rate [°C(°F)] condensing

Storage temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158 °F)

Long-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing
[RH]

Short-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing
[RH]

Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing

Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] ≤ 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) (For the
altitude in the range of 1800 m to
4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
operating temperature of the device
must decrease by 1°C [1.8°F] for every
220 m [721.78 ft.].)

Storage altitude [m(ft.)] < 5000 m (16404.2 ft.)

Breakout supported Yes

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Yes


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

FlexE supported Yes
Physical ports 20, 8, 9, and 12 can be
added to the same group. port-id
ranges from 1000 to 3000. A
maximum of 36 FlexE clients can be
created.
Physical ports 21, 10, 11, and 14 can
be added to the same group. port-id
ranges from 1000 to 3000. A
maximum of 36 FlexE clients can be
created.
Physical ports 22, 13, 16, and 17 can
be added to the same group. port-id
ranges from 1000 to 3000. A
maximum of 36 FlexE clients can be
created.
Physical ports 23, 15, 18, and 19 can
be added to the same group. port-id
ranges from 1000 to 3000. A
maximum of 36 FlexE clients can be
created.
Physical ports 24, 28, and 29 can be
added to the same group. port-id
ranges from 1000 to 3000. A
maximum of 36 FlexE clients can be
created.
Physical ports 25, 30, 31 can be added
to the same group. port-id ranges from
1000 to 3000. A maximum of 36 FlexE
clients can be created.

RTU supported Yes
Ports 20 to 27: These ports work at a
rate of 100 Gbit/s by default. To use
higher port bandwidth, load the
corresponding RTU license.
Ports 0 to 19 and 28 to 63: These ports
are limited to a bandwidth of 100
Mbit/s by default. To change the port
bandwidth mode, load the
corresponding RTU license.
To check the list of RTU licenses
supported by the device and the
loading method, use the License Query
tool or see the related license usage
guide.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

NO TE

● About condensation
The ability of air to contain moisture reduces as the temperature decreases. There is a
relationship between temperature and relative humidity. As the temperature decreases,
the air becomes more saturated with moisture, meaning the relative humidity increases.
But at a low enough temperature (called the dew point), the air can no longer contain
moisture, which is then precipitated as liquid water. Such water on the surface of
relevant equipment is called condensation.
● Hazards of condensation
When condensation mixes with dust inside the equipment, it forms conductive channels
that affect the electrical insulation of the equipment. As a result, a non-conductive area
of the equipment can become conductive, causing the equipment to malfunction.
● Conditions that cause condensation
Condensation is related to temperature changes and humidity. It occurs when the
temperature continues to decrease below the dew point at a given humidity. For
example, given that the relative humidity is 50% RH and the temperature is 25°C (77°F),
condensation occurs when the temperature decreases below 13.9°C (57.02°F).

3.2 Power

3.2.1 NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H Power Module

3.2.1.1 PAC3KS54-DB (AC&240VDC PSU,PAC3KS54-DB,3000W AC 240V DC
Power Module (Back to Front,Power panel side exhaust))

Overview

Table 3-10 Basic information about the PAC3KS54-DB
Item Details

Description AC&240VDC PSU,PAC3KS54-DB,3000W
AC 240V DC Power Module (Back to
Front,Power panel side exhaust)

Part Number 02312TCB

Model PAC3KS54-DB




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 30
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-10 Appearance of the PAC3KS54-DB


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=02312TCB&productModel=PAC3KS54-DB#matchRelation


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 31
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Panel

Table 3-11 Indicators on the PAC3KS54-DB
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Working Green Steady on The power
status module is
indicator working
properly.

Green Blinking (1 The power
Hz) module is in
the standby
state, or the
power
module has
been powered
on but is not
installed in
the system.

Green Blinking (4 The system
Hz) program is
being loaded.

Green Off The power
module is not
powered on
or there is no
power input.

Red Steady on The power
module
encounters a
hardware
fault.


Table 3-12 Ports on the PAC3KS54-DB
Port Description

AC power cable connector Connects to the AC power cable




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 32
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-13 Technical specifications of the PAC3KS54-DB
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 39.6 mm x 66 mm x 349 mm (1.56 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 2.6 in. x 13.74 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] < 1.4 kg (< 3.09 lb)

Number of inputs 1

Rated input voltage [V] 100 V to 240 V AC, supporting 240
HVDC
AC: 100 V to 130 V dual-live wire/200
V to 240 V
HVDC: 240 V

Input voltage range [V] 90 V to 290 V AC

Maximum input current [A] 16 A

Rated output voltage [V] 53.5 V

Rated output current [A] 56 A (input: 200 V AC to 290 V AC/200
VDC to 290 V DC)
52 A (input: 176 V AC to 200 V AC/190
VDC to 200 V DC)

Rated output power [W] 3000 W (input: 200 V AC to 290 V AC/
200V DC to 290 V DC)
2800 W (input: 176 V AC to 200 V AC/
190V DC to 200 V DC)

Power supply efficiency 0.9

Power dissipation Mode Built-in fan

Type of power cables C19 cable


3.2.1.2 PAC3KS54-DF (AC&240VDC PSU,PAC3KS54-DF,2500W/3000W
AC&240VDC Power Module (Front to Back, Power panel side intake))


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 33
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Overview

Table 3-14 Basic information about the PAC3KS54-DF
Item Details

Description AC&240VDC PSU,PAC3KS54-
DF,2500W/3000W AC&240VDC Power
Module (Front to Back, Power panel
side intake)

Part Number 02312TCA

Model PAC3KS54-DF


Appearance

Figure 3-11 Appearance of the PAC3KS54-DF


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=02312TCA&productModel=PAC3KS54-DF#matchRelation

Panel

Figure 3-12 Panel of the PAC3KS54-DF


1. Running 2. Handle 3. Air vent 4. Power 5. Clip hole
status hole socket
indicator

Table 3-15 Indicators on the PAC3KS54-DF
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Working Green Steady on the power
status input is
indicator normal.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Green Blinking (1 The power
Hz) module is in
the standby
state, or the
power
module has
been powered
on but is not
installed in
the system.

Green Blinking (4 The system
Hz) program is
being loaded.

Green Off the power
module is
switched off
or the
hardware of
the power
module is
faulty.

Red Steady on The power
module
encounters a
hardware
fault.



Table 3-16 Ports on the PAC3KS54-DF

Port Description

AC power cable connector Connects to the AC power cable



Technical Specifications

Table 3-17 Technical specifications of the PAC3KS54-DF

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 39.6 mm x 66 mm x 349 mm (1.56 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 2.6 in. x 13.74 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 1.4 kg (3.09 lb)

Number of inputs 1

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Rated input voltage [V] 100 V AC–240 V AC, supporting 240 V
HVDC
AC: 100 V to 130 V dual-live wire/200
V to 240 V
HVDC: 240 V

Input voltage range [V] 90 V to 290 V AC

Maximum input current [A] 16 A

Rated output voltage [V] 53.5 V

Rated output current [A] 56 A (input: 200 V AC to 290 V AC/200
V AC to 290 V DC)
52 A (input: 176 V AC to 200 V AC/190
V DC to 200 V DC)

Rated output power [W] 3000 W (input: 200 V AC to 290 V
AC/200 V AC to 290 V DC)
2800 W (input: 176 V AC to 200 V
AC/190 V DC to 200 V DC)

Power supply efficiency 0.9

Power dissipation Mode Built-in fan

Type of power cables C19 cable


3.2.1.3 PDC2K2S54-CB (DC Power Module,PDC2K2S54-CB,2200W DC Power
Module(Back to Front , Power panel side exhaust))

Overview

Table 3-18 Basic information about the PDC2K2S54-CB
Item Details

Description DC Power Module,PDC2K2S54-
CB,2200W DC Power Module(Back to
Front , Power panel side exhaust)

Part Number 02312YCP

Model PDC2K2S54-CB




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-13 Appearance of the PDC2K2S54-CB


NO TE

To facilitate power cable routing, it is recommended that the power cable is connected only
to power jack A on the right of the power module.

Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=02312YCP&productModel=PDC2K2S54-CB#matchRelation


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 38
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Panel

Table 3-19 Indicators on the PDC2K2S54-CB
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Working Green Steady on The power
status module is
indicator working
properly.

Green Blinking (1 The power
Hz) module is in
the standby
state, or the
power
module has
been powered
on but is not
installed in
the system.

Green Blinking (4 The system
Hz) program is
being loaded.

Green Off The power
module is not
powered on
or there is no
power input.

Red Steady on The power
module
encounters a
hardware
fault.


Table 3-20 Ports on the PDC2K2S54-CB
Port Description

NEG(-) Connects to the negative pole of the
DC power cable.

RTN(+) Connects to the positive pole of the
DC power cable.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-21 Technical specifications of the PDC2K2S54-CB
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 39.6 mm x 66 mm x 349 mm (1.56 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 2.6 in. x 13.74 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 1.5 kg (3.31 lb)

Number of inputs 1

Rated input voltage [V] –48 V to –60 V

Input voltage range [V] –40 V to –72 V

Maximum input current [A] 50 A

Rated output voltage [V] 53.5 V

Rated output current [A] 41 A

Rated output power [W] 2200 W

Power supply efficiency 0.9

Power dissipation Mode Built-in fan


3.2.1.4 PDC2K2S54-CF (DC Power Module,PDC2K2S54-CF,2200W DC Power
Module(Front to Back, Power panel side intake))

Overview

Table 3-22 Basic information about the PDC2K2S54-CF
Item Details

Description DC Power Module,PDC2K2S54-
CF,2200W DC Power Module(Front to
Back, Power panel side intake)

Part Number 02312VSW

Model PDC2K2S54-CF




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 40
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-14 Appearance of the PDC2K2S54-CF


NO TE

To facilitate power cable routing, it is recommended that the power cable is connected only
to power jack A on the right of the power module.

Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=02312VSW&productModel=PDC2K2S54-CF#matchRelation


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Panel

Figure 3-15 Panel of the PDC2K2S54-DF


1. Running status 2. Handle 3. Air vent hole 4. Power socket
indicator (two inputs A and
B)

Table 3-23 Indicators on the PDC2K2S54-CF
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Working Green Steady on The power
status module is
indicator working
properly.

Green Blinking (1 The power
Hz) module is in
the standby
state, or the
power
module has
been powered
on but is not
installed in
the system.

Green Blinking (4 The system
Hz) program is
being loaded.

Green Off The power
module is not
powered on
or there is no
power input.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Red Steady on The power
module
encounters a
hardware
fault.



Table 3-24 Ports on the PDC2K2S54-CF

Port Description

NEG(-) Connects to the negative pole of the
DC power cable.

RTN(+) Connects to the positive pole of the
DC power cable.



Technical Specifications

Table 3-25 Technical specifications of the PDC2K2S54-CF

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 39.6 mm x 66 mm x 349 mm (1.56 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 2.6 in. x 13.74 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 1.5 kg (3.31 lb)

Number of inputs 2

Rated input voltage [V] –48 V/–60 V

Input voltage range [V] –40 V to –72 V

Maximum input current [A] 50 A

Rated output voltage [V] 53.5 V

Rated output current [A] 41 A

Rated output power [W] 2200 W

Power supply efficiency 0.9

Power dissipation Mode Built-in fan



3.3 Fan


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.3.1 NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H Fan Module

3.3.1.1 FAN-180D-B (Fan box(B,FAN panel side exhaust))

Overview

Table 3-26 Basic information about the FAN-180D-B
Item Details

Description Fan box(B,FAN panel side exhaust)

Part Number 02353KQP

Model FAN-180D-B




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-16 Appearance of the FAN-180D-B


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=02353KQP&productModel=FAN-180D-B#matchRelation

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Panel

Table 3-27 Indicators on the FAN-180D-B
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Fan status Green steady The board is
indicator working
properly

Red steady The fan
module is
faulty

Green off The fan
module is not
powered on
or encounters
a hardware
error


Technical Specifications

Table 3-28 Technical specifications of the FAN-180D-B
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 82 mm x 82 mm x 129.5 mm (3.23 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 3.23 in. x 5.10 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.86 kg (1.90 lb)

Number of fans 1

Typical power consumption [W] 35 W


3.3.1.2 FAN-180D-F (Fan box(F,FAN panel side intake ))

Overview

Table 3-29 Basic information about the FAN-180D-F
Item Details

Description Fan box(F,FAN panel side intake )

Part Number 02354EUF

Model FAN-180D-F



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 46
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-17 Appearance of the FAN-180D-F


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=02354EUF&productModel=FAN-180D-F#matchRelation

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Panel

Table 3-30 Indicators on the FAN-180D-F

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Fan status Green steady The board is
indicator working
properly

Red steady The fan
module is
faulty

Green off The fan
module is not
powered on
or encounters
a hardware
error



Technical Specifications

Table 3-31 Technical specifications of the FAN-180D-F

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 82 mm x 82 mm x 129.5 mm (3.23 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 3.23 in. x 5.10 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.86 kg (1.90 lb)

Number of fans 1

Typical power consumption [W] 35 W



3.4 Optical Module

3.4.1 Understanding Pluggable Optical Modules


3.4.1.1 Appearance and Structure

Figure1 shows the structure of an optical module.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-18 Optical module structure


1. Handle 2. Receiver 3. Transmitter 4. Shell

5. Label 6. Dust cap 7. Spring 8. Module
connector

3.4.1.2 Types of Optical Modules

Optical modules are available in various types to meet diversified requirements.

● Classified by transmission rates
Currently, the transmission rates of optical modules cover a wide range.
According to different transmission rates, optical modules can be classified
into 400 Gbit/s optical modules, 200 Gbit/s optical modules, 100 Gbit/s optical
modules, 40 Gbit/s optical modules, 25 Gbit/s optical modules, and 10 Gbit/s
optical modules, 2.5 Gbit/s optical modules, 1.25 Gbit/s optical modules, 1000
Mbit/s optical modules, 155 Mbit/s optical modules, and 100 Mbit/s optical
modules.
● Classified by encapsulation types
The higher transmission rate an optical module provides, the more complex
structure it has. According to the encapsulation type, optical modules are
classified into SFP, eSFP, SFP+, XFP, SFP28, QSFP28, QSFP+, CXP, CFP, CSFP, and
QSFP-DD.
– SFP: small form-factor pluggable.
– eSFP: enhanced small form-factor pluggable. An eSFP module is an SFP
module that supports monitoring of voltage, temperature, bias current,
transmit optical power, and receive optical power. Currently, SFP modules
also have the preceding functions. Therefore, eSFP and SFP optical
modules are both called SFP optical modules.
– SFP+: small form-factor pluggable plus. An SPF+ optical module is an SFP
module with a higher rate. SFP+ modules are more sensitive to
electromagnetic interference (EMI) because they have a higher rate.
Compared with SFP modules, SFP+ optical modules use more springs and
tighter SFP+ optical module cages.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

– XFP: 10G small form-factor pluggable. X is the Roman numeral 10,
meaning that all XFP optical modules provide a transmission rate of 10
Gbit/s. XFP optical modules are wider and longer than SFP+ optical
modules.
– SFP28: small form-factor pluggable 28. The size of an SFP28 optical
module is the same as that of an SFP+ optical module. An SFP28 port can
use a 25G SFP28 optical module or 10G SFP+ optical module.
– QSFP28: quad small form-factor pluggable 28. The size of a QSFP28
optical module is the same as that of a QSFP+ optical module. A QSFP28
port can use either a 100G QSFP28 optical module or a 40G QSFP+
optical module.
– QSFP+: quad small form-factor pluggable plus. A QSFP+ optical module
supports the MPO connector and is larger than an SFP+ optical module.
– QSFP-DD: quad small form factor pluggable-double density. A QSFP-DD
optical module is a high-speed pluggable module defined by the QSFP-
DD MSA group.
– CXP: extended-capability form-factor pluggable. A CXP optical module is
a hot-pluggable high-density parallel optical module, which provides 12
channels of traffic in each of the Tx and Rx directions. It applies only to
short-distance multimode links.
– CFP: centum form-factor pluggable, a new standard for high-speed, hot-
pluggable optical transceivers that support data communication and
telecommunication applications. The dimensions of a CFP optical module
are 13.6 mm x 144.75 mm x 82 mm (0.54 in. x 5.70 in. x 3.23 in.).
– CSFP: compact small form-factor pluggable. A CSFP optical module is a
compact SFP transceiver with two 100 Mbit/s or 1 Gbit/s single-fiber
bidirectional transceivers inside a standard SFP form factor. Its compact
and low-power design allows the system supplier to double port density
and access channel quantity for the LPU. This type of optical module is
mainly used in scenarios where one CSFP optical module connects to two
BIDI SFP optical modules. It is essential to ensure that the transmit and
receive wavelengths are consistent and the transmission distances are the
same.
● Classified by physical layer standards
Different physical layer standards are defined to allow data transmission in
different modes. Therefore, different types of optical modules are produced to
comply with these standards. For details, see Standards compliance of the
specific optical module.
● Classified by modes
Optical fibers are classified into single-mode and multimode fibers. Therefore,
optical modules are also classified into single-mode and multimode modules
to support different optical fibers.
– Single-mode optical modules are used with single-mode fibers. Single-
mode fibers support a wide band and large transmission capacity, and are
used for long-distance transmission.
– Multimode optical modules are used with multimode fibers. Multimode
fibers have lower transmission performance than single-mode fibers
because of modal dispersion, but their costs are also lower. They are used
for small-capacity, short-distance transmission.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Wavelength division multiplexing modules differ from other optical modules in
center wavelengths. A common optical module has a center wavelength of 850
nm, 1310 nm, or 1550 nm, whereas a wavelength division multiplexing module
transmits lights with different center wavelengths. Wavelength division
multiplexing modules are classified into two types: coarse wavelength division
multiplexing (CWDM) and dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM).
Within the same band, DWDM modules are available in more types and use
wavelength resources more efficiently than CWDM modules. DWDM and CWDM
modules allow lights with different center wavelengths to be transmitted on one
fiber without interfering each other. Therefore, a passive multiplexer can be used
to combine the lights into one channel, which is then split into multiple channels
by a demultiplexer on the remote end. This reduces the optical fibers required.
DWDM and CWDM modules are used for long-distance transmission.
The transmit power of a long-distance optical module is often larger than its
overload power. Therefore, when using such optical modules, select optical fibers
of an appropriate length to ensure that the actual receive power is smaller than
the overload power. If the optical fibers connected to a long-distance optical
module are too short, use an optical attenuator to reduce the receive power on
the remote optical module. Otherwise, the remote optical module may be burnt.

3.4.1.3 Instruction
The following lists some common optical modules, which may not be supported
by this product. The figures are for reference only.

Table 3-32 Commonly used optical modules
Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type

SFP LC Single-fiber-bidirectional transceiver


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type

eSFP LC Two-fiber bidirectional


Single-fiber-bidirectional transceiver


SFP+ LC Two-fiber bidirectional


Single-fiber-bidirectional transceiver


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type

XFP LC Two-fiber bidirectional


Single-fiber-bidirectional transceiver


SFP28 LC Two-fiber bidirectional


Single-fiber-bidirectional transceiver


QSFP2 LC/MPO Two-fiber bidirectional
8


Single-fiber-bidirectional transceiver


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type

QSFP+ LC/MPO


CXP MPO


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type

CFP LC/MPO CFP


CFP2


CFP4


CFP8


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type

CSFP LC


QSFP- LC
DD




3.4.1.4 Instructions on How to Use an Optical Module

This section describes instructions on how to use an optical module.

NO TE

Only optical modules matching Huawei products can be used. These optical modules are
strictly tested by Huawei. If non-matching optical modules are used, device requirements
may fail to be met, and services may fail to run properly. To replace optical modules, see
Parts Replacement-Replacing an Optical Module.

ESD Measures

Before touching any optical module, wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. Take
full ESD measures when installing optical apparatus such as optical modules
indoors or outdoors.

Figure 3-19 Methods of wearing ESD gloves


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-20 Methods of wearing an ESD wrist strap


Placing Optical Apparatus and Fibers

Do not touch pins or connecting fingers with bare hands. Handle the optical fibers
gently. Use two fingers to hold the fiber connector instead of grasping the fiber or
the fiber cover.

Do not apply axial or lateral fiber wallop bumps on the fiber. Do not fold, twist, or
crush the tail fiber. Do not drag the tail fiber or press the coupling point of the tail
fiber. Figure 3-21 shows how to properly place optical apparatus and fibers.

Figure 3-21 Methods of placing optical apparatus and fibers


NO TE

During installation, ensure that an optical fiber is coiled into a loop with a diameter of at
least 6 cm (0.20 ft).

Uninstalling Optical Apparatus
● Release the latch and slowly take out the optical apparatus. Do not drag the
optical fiber to forcibly take out the optical module. Ensure that the optical
fiber is connected to and removed from the optical interface horizontally.
Before taking out an optical module, remove its optical fiber and release its
latch first.

Figure 3-22 Closed latch


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-23 Open latch


● The black plastic latch shown by (1) in Figure 3-24 is the unlocking device for
the 155 Mbit/s electrical interface optical module. Hold the two sides of the
optical module to remove it, as shown by (2) in Figure 3-24.

Figure 3-24 Removing a 155 Mbit/s electrical interface optical module


Do not remove the black plastic latch when removing the 155 Mbit/s
electrical interface optical module.


If the black plastic latch falls off, use an auxiliary tool, such as a pair of
tweezers, to press the cage buckle, as shown in the following figure. Then,
hold the two sides of the electrical interface optical module to remove it.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description


● If the CFP2 optical module is used, its unlocking device is a spring clip, as
shown by (1) in Figure 3-25. Before removing such an optical module, release
the latch first.

Figure 3-25 Removing a CFP2 optical module


● When removing a CFP optical module, loosen the two screw rods of the
module and then remove the module slowly. Do not directly drag the optical
fiber to pull out the optical module or forcibly pull out the optical module.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description


CA UTION

The QSFP28 and QSFP-DD modules will get very hot during operation. To
prevent injuries, do not touch the module shells when removing the modules.

Precautions for Loosened Optical Modules
● When installing an optical module, force it into position. If a crack sound is
heard or a slight tremor is felt, it indicates that the latch boss is secured.
When the latch boss is not secured, the connecting finger is unstably
connected to the connector on the board, and the link may become up. On
the condition that the optical module tremors or collides with another object,
however, the optical module will be loosened or the optical signals will be
temporarily cut off.
● When inserting the optical module, make sure that the tab is closed. (At this
time, the latch boss locks the optical module.) After the optical module is
inserted, try pulling it out to see if it is installed in position. If the optical
module cannot be pulled out, it is secured.
● If you cannot push the optical module into an optical module cage any
longer, the optical module is in good contact with the board connector.
● When installing a CFP optical module, push the module panel horizontally
into the connector using even force with both thumbs. After the module is
inserted, push the module slightly to ensure that it has reached the stop
position.
● After the CFP optical module is securely inserted, tighten the two screw rods
of the module alternately. To prevent the module from getting loosened due
to vibration or collision, you are advised to use a screwdriver to tighten the
screw rods.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Precautions for Receptacle Contamination
● Clean tissues must be prepared for deployment on site. You need to clean the
optical connector before inserting it in the receptacle. This protects the
receptacle against the contamination.

NO TE

Use at least three cleaning tissues. Wipe the end of an optical connector horizontally
in one direction, and then move the connector end to the unused part of the cleaning
tissue to continue. Generally, one cleaning tissue is used for cleaning an optical
connector.


● To prevent contamination, the optical module should be covered with either a
dust cap or an optical connector.
Cover an optical module with a dust cap.


Cover an optical module with an optical connector


● Lay the optical fibers on the optical distribution frame (ODF) or coil them up
in a fiber management tray. Make sure that the optical fibers are not
squeezed.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description


● If a receptacle or an optical connector has not been used for a long time and
has not been covered with a dust cap, you should clean it before using it. A
cotton swab is used to clean a receptacle, and a cleaning tissue is used to
clean an optical connector.

NO TE

During the cleaning process, insert the cotton swab and turn it slowly in the
receptacle. Do not use too much force, because the receptacle may be damaged.


● If, for no apparent reason, optical signals are lost during the operation of a
device, use the preceding method to clean the receptacle or the optical
connector. This will eliminate contamination as the cause of the signal loss.

Precautions for Overload-caused Burnt Optical Modules
● When using an OTDR to test the connectivity or the attenuation of optical
signals, disconnect the optical connector from the optical module. Otherwise,
the optical module may be burnt.
● When performing a self-loop test, use an optical attenuator. Do not loosen
the optical connector.
● It is required that a long-distance optical module have an input optical power
of less than -7 dBm. If the input optical power is larger than -7 dBm, you
need to add an optical attenuator. For example, if the transmitting optical
power is X dBm and the optical attenuation is Y dB, the receiving optical
power is X-Y, which must be smaller than -7dBm (X-Y<-7 dBm).


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors

The Ethernet port rate is increasing and the quality requirement for optical fibers
and optical cables is higher. Table 3-33 describes requirements for the loss of
optical fiber connectors according to the national standard (GBT50312-2016).

Table 3-33 Maximum attenuation of the optical fiber connector

Type Maximum attenuation of an optical fiber
connector (dB)

Fiber splicing connector 0.3

Optical mechanical connector 0.3

Optical connector 0.75



NO TE

Fiber cores are connected through connectors, such as the ODF, optical attenuator, and
flange, in splicing and mechanical modes.

Table 3-34 describes requirements for the reflection of the optical fiber connector
when Ethernet ports (such as 200G and 50G) use PAM4 encoding to double the
rate. More connectors bring lower requirements for the reflection.

Table 3-34 Maximum reflection of connectors

Number of Optical Fiber Maximum Reflection of Each Connector
Connectors (dB)

1 -22

2 -29

4 -33

6 -35

8 -37

10 -39



The loss and reflection values of optical fiber connectors are tested and processed
as follows:

1. After the optical fiber at the peer end is disconnected, use the OTDR meter to
test the local end. Check whether the loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal. (The loss of a fiber splicing connector should be less than
0.3 dB, the loss of a connector should be less than 0.75 dB, and the reflection
of a connector should be less than -30 dB.) If the test result is not within the
required range, process the abnormal port.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

2. Locate the equipment room where the port resides based on the distance
between abnormal points in the OTDR test result. Preliminarily determine the
port location, disconnect the port, and perform an OTDR test on the port that
reports alarms. Check whether the distance is consistent with that in the
previous test. If not, continue to test other ports.
3. After the abnormal port is found, test the port using a fiber microscope. If the
port is dirty, clean it.
4. After the port is cleaned, restore the port, and ensure that the connector is
tightened. Perform an OTDR test on the port to check whether loss and
reflection of each link and node are normal.
5. If the fault persists, replace the flange and perform an OTDR test on the port
that reports alarms to check whether loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal.
6. If the fault persists, replace the optical fiber and perform an OTDR test on the
port that reports alarms to check whether loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal.
7. If multiple abnormal points exist on the link, repeat steps 2 to 6.

Other Precautions
● The optical connector should be horizontally inserted in the receptacle to
avoid damages to the receptacle.


● Mixed use of multi-mode and single-mode optical fibers is prohibited.
Otherwise, faults such as signal loss may occur.
Method of distinguishing optical modules in single mode and multi-mode.

Table 3-35 Method of distinguishing optical modules in single mode and
multi-mode
Item Single Mode Multi-mode

Transmission distance 10 km or longer Below 0.5 km

Wavelength Non-850 nm 850 nm

Information on the SM MM
label


50G Optical Module Installation Guide
1. Precautions for optical module installation
(1) If a cabinet with a door is used, a sufficient distance must be reserved between
the optical module and the cabinet door to prevent the puller or patch cord from
bumping on the door.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

(2) Long-distance optical modules must be equipped with optical attenuators for
self-loops. For a 50GBase-ER (40 km) long-distance optical module, the receive
optical power damage threshold is lower than the average minimum transmit
optical power, making the module prone to damage caused by self-loops.
Therefore, the module must be equipped with an optical attenuator for self-loops.
(3) When optical path quality is tested using an OTDR, optical fibers must be
removed from the associated optical module. This is because the OTDR's transmit
optical power is far greater than the optical power damage threshold at the
receive end of an optical module.
2. Method of checking an optical path

Figure 3-26 Method of checking an optical path


3. Method of cleaning the end faces of an optical fiber
Before cleaning the end faces of an optical fiber that is in use, ensure that the
optical fiber has no optical signals. To achieve this, shut down the ports at both
ends of the fiber. Then, clean the end faces and insert the optical fiber back into
the corresponding port.
To clean the end faces of an optical fiber that is not in use, remove the dust-proof
cap from the fiber connector (or the patch cord connector of the involved optical
component), and put the dust-proof cap into a dedicated cleaning kit. After the
cleaning is complete, re-install the dust-proof cap.
● Use the untouched part of a lint-free wipe to wipe the connector end face
along one direction.
● If the end face of an optical fiber cannot be cleaned due to serious
contamination, use a lint-free wipe dipped with cleanser to wipe the end face
along one direction. Then, use a dry lint-free wipe to clean the end face.
Ensure that the end face is dry before using the optical fiber.
● After the cleaning is complete, immediately install a dust-proof cap for any
optical fiber connector that is not in use.
4. Precautions for using a lint-free wipe to clean the end face of an optical
fiber
● Use a smooth surface of the lint-free wipe for cleaning.
● Ensure that the optical fiber connector is vertical to the lint-free wipe during
cleaning.
● Wipe the end face along the direction of the lint-free wipe's grain.
● Wipe the end face along one direction only.
● Any part of a lint-free wipe can be used only once, and a small piece of lint-
free wipe can be used to clean only one connector.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 65
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

5. Method of using lint-free swabs to clean the optical port of an optical
module

Remove the dust-proof cap from the optical port of the optical module, and put
the dust-proof cap into a dedicated cleaning kit.

● Select a proper lint-free swab based on the type of the optical port to be
cleaned. (For SC optical ports, use lint-free swabs with a diameter of 2.5 mm;
for LC and MTRJ optical ports, use lint-free swabs with a diameter of 1.25
mm.) Dip the lint-free swab into cleanser, insert it into the inside of the
optical port, and clean the optical port by rotating the swab 360 degrees in
one direction along the inner wall of the optical port.
● Insert a dry lint-free swab of the same type into the inside of the optical port
and clean the optical port by rotating the swab 360 degrees in one direction
along the inner wall of the optical port.
● Cap the optical port after the cleaning is complete.

6. Precautions for using lint-free swabs to clean the optical port of an optical
module

● When cleaning the optical port of an optical module, clean the end faces of
associated optical fibers to prevent the optical fibers from dirtying the optical
port.
● In general, each lint-free swab can be used for cleaning only once. If a used
lint-free swab is confirmed clean and can be reused, it can be used for a
maximum of three times. For example, a lint-free swab that is ever used to
dry an optical port can be used for a maximum of three times.

7. Safety precautions

● Electrostatic protection: Active optical and electrical components are
extremely sensitive to electrostatic. Therefore, take strict measures to protect
against electrostatic. For example, wear ESD gloves during operations and
touch only the shell of the involved component.
● Laser protection: Do not look into optical ports without eye protection when
reseating a module.

8. Discrete reflectance

Focus on the reflection indicators of each node during link deployment. The
discrete reflection indicators must meet the IEEE standards.

Table 3-36 Maximum discrete reflectance of QSFP28 50G defined by IEEE

Number of QSFP28 50G-FR QSFP28 50G-LR QSFP28 50G-ER
discrete (Maximum value (Maximum value (Maximum value
reflectances of each discrete of each discrete of each discrete
greater than –55 reflectance) reflectance) reflectance)
dB

1 -25 dB -22 dB -19 dB

2 -31 dB -29 dB -27 dB

4 -35 dB -33 dB -32 dB

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 66
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Number of QSFP28 50G-FR QSFP28 50G-LR QSFP28 50G-ER
discrete (Maximum value (Maximum value (Maximum value
reflectances of each discrete of each discrete of each discrete
greater than –55 reflectance) reflectance) reflectance)
dB

6 -38 dB -35 dB -35 dB

8 -40 dB -37 dB -37 dB

10 -41 dB -39 dB -39 dB


3.4.1.5 Configuring an Optical Attenuator
This section describes how to configure an optical attenuator.

Calculating the Optical Attenuation
You can calculate the optical attenuation based on the actual optical power.

Table 3-37 Description of parameters for calculating optical attenuation
Name Description

P(in)min Worst sensitivity.

P(out)max Maximum transmit optical power.

S Transmission distance.

A Attenuation coefficient. Note that the
attenuation coefficient is related to
optical fiber types and wavelengths. By
default, the attenuation coefficient of
a 1310-nm wavelength in a G.652
fiber is 0.45 dBm/km or 0.4 dBm/km;
the attenuation coefficient of a 1550-
nm wavelength in a G.652 fiber is
0.235 dBm/km or 0.25 dBm/km.

P(in)max Maximum receive optical power, that
is, minimum overload point.


The principle for determining whether an attenuator needs to be configured at a
transmission point is as follows:
If P(out)max – S x Attenuation coefficient > P(in)max, an attenuator needs to be
configured. The optical attenuation is calculated in the following formula: T=
P(out)max - S x Attenuation coefficient - P(in)max.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 67
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-38 Reference for configuring an attenuator
BOM Descriptio P(out) P(out) P(in) P(in)
Number n max min min max

34060276 eSFP,1310n -8 dBm -15 dBm -31 dBm -8 dBm
m,STM1,LC
,SM,15km



NO TE

● If P(in)max of an optical module equals P(out)max, you do not need to configure an
attenuator.
● You can choose the 5 dBm and 10 dBm attenuators for optical modules on the device.

BOM Number and Description of Attenuators

Table 3-39 BOM number and description of attenuators
BOM Number Description

45030021 Fixed Optical
Attenuator,1260nm~1620nm-5dB-LC/
PC-45dB

45030022 Fixed Optical
Attenuator,1260nm~1620nm-10dB-LC/
PC-45dB



NO TE

This table is for reference only. BOM numbers of attenuators vary with configuration
documents.
3.4.2 OA Overview

3.4.2.1 Functions

An optical amplifier (OA) is a C-band pluggable optical amplification module,
which can be configured at the transmit or receive end of a device according to
the actual scenario.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-40 OA functions
Function Description

Basic function Amplifies optical signals over C-band wavelengths in the range
from 1535 nm to 1547 nm.

Pluggable Is pluggable.

Gain Adjusts the gain based on the input optical power to achieve
adjustment continuous gain adjustment in the range from 9 dB to 23 dB.

Power Fixes the output power at 7 dBm according to the input power
adjustment range.

Working mode Indicates the working mode. In power locking and gain locking
modes, the EDFA module's gain is adjustable and its actual
gain can be queried.

Performance ● Monitors and reports optical power.
and alarm ● Controls the temperature of the pump laser.
monitoring
● Monitors the pump drive current, cooling current, pump
laser temperature, and ambient temperature of the board.


3.4.2.2 Appearance and Structure

Figure 3-27 Appearance of an OA


Figure 3-28 shows the structure of an OA.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 69
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-28 Structure of an OA


1. Shell 2. Signal direction 3. Pull tab
indication

4. Connector 5. Receive port 6. Transmit port

Table 3-41 Type and function of OA ports
Port Silkscreen Port Type Function

IN/OUT LC Amplifies multiplexed
signals.

3.4.2.3 Usage Scenarios

When a router uses an 80 km QSFP-DD optical module, an OA is required. Deploy
OAs at the transmit and receive ends based on the transmission distance between
interconnected routers and the insertion loss of optical links. In addition, configure
the working mode of each OA in the corresponding port view.
The following figure shows an OA usage scenario.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

NO TE

1. When the transmission distance ranges from 40 km to 80 km and the insertion loss of
optical links is less than 22 dB, OAs need to be deployed only at the transmit end.
2. When the transmission distance ranges from 80 km to 120 km:
● If the insertion loss of an optical link is less than or equal to 24 dB, OAs need to be
deployed only at the transmit end.
● If the insertion loss of an optical link is greater than 24 dB but less than or equal
to 28 dB, OAs must be deployed at both the transmit and receive ends. In this case,
the receive optical power threshold of the QSFP-DD optical module must be
manually modified.
● If the insertion loss of an optical link is greater than 28 dB, reduce it to a value less
than 28 dB.
Figure 3-29 shows how to deploy an OA at the transmit end.

Figure 3-29 Deploying an OA at the transmit end


Figure 3-30 shows how to deploy an OA at the receive end.

Figure 3-30 Deploying an OA at the receive end


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 71
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-31 Deploying a 02314UKA OA


3.4.2.4 Guide to Using OAs

NO TE

● OAs need to be used in indoor scenarios with thermal power exchange or in
environments that can guarantee the working conditions of OAs.
● An OA can be inserted into a port for installing the QSFP-DD/QSFP28/QSFP+ optical
module or a dedicated power supply port on a router.
● An OA can amplify the optical signals of only one fiber.
● An OA can be connected only to a 400G ZR/ZR+ optical module, either on the same
board or on a different board, through an optical fiber.
● Only OAs matching Huawei products can be used. If non-matching OAs are used, device
requirements may fail to be met, and services may fail to run properly.

ESD Measures
Before touching an OA, wear ESD gloves or an ESD wrist strap. Take ESD measures
when installing an OA indoors or outdoors.

Figure 3-32 Methods of wearing an ESD glove


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 72
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-33 Methods of wearing an ESD wrist strap


Placing Optical Apparatus and Fibers
Avoid touching pins or edge connectors with bare hands. Handle optical fibers
delicately. Use two fingers to grip the fiber connector instead of directly holding
the fiber or its cover.
Avoid applying axial or lateral pressure to a fiber. Refrain from folding or twisting
a fiber or crushing its pigtail. Do not drag a fiber or apply pressure to the coupling
point of its pigtail. Figure 3-34 shows how to properly place optical apparatus and
fibers.

Figure 3-34 Methods of placing optical apparatus and fibers


NO TE

During installation, ensure that an optical fiber is coiled into a loop with a diameter of at
least 6 cm.

Uninstalling Optical Apparatus
When removing an OA, first disconnect its optical fiber, then pull the tab latch,
and slowly take out the OA. Avoid forcefully pulling out an OA by directly
dragging its optical fiber. Ensure that the optical fiber is connected to and
removed from an OA horizontally.

Precautions for Loose OAs
● When installing an OA, firmly push it into position until you hear a click or
feel a slight tremor, signaling that the OA is securely locked. If the OA is not
securely locked, its edge connector may be loosely connected to the board
connector, and the link may still be up. However, if the OA experiences
tremors or collisions with other objects, it may come loose or temporarily lose
optical signals.
● When installing an OA into an optical module cage, push it firmly into
position until it cannot be pushed any further. This ensures that the OA has
good contact with the board connector.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Precautions for Receptacle Contamination
● Prepare clean tissues for onsite use. Clean an optical connector before
inserting it into the receptacle to protect the receptacle against
contamination.

NO TE

Use at least three cleaning tissues. Wipe the end of an optical connector horizontally
in one direction, and then shift the connector to the unused part of the cleaning tissue
to continue. Generally, one cleaning tissue is used for cleaning one optical connector.


● Cover OAs that are temporarily unused with dust-proof caps to prevent dust
pollution. If no dust-proof caps are available, inserting fibers can effectively
prevent dust from entering these OAs.
● Place optical fiber jumpers that are temporarily unused on the optical
distribution frame (ODF) or coil them up in a fiber management tray. Ensure
that they are not compressed or squeezed.


● If OAs or optical fibers remain unused for a long time without being covered
with dust-proof caps, clean their receptacles or optical connectors before
using them again. Use cotton swabs to clean receptacles and cleaning tissues
to clean optical connectors.

NO TE

When cleaning a receptacle, gently insert a cotton swab and rotate it without applying
excessive force. Otherwise, the receptacle may be damaged.
● If optical signals are unexpectedly lost during device operation, use the
previously mentioned method to clean the receptacle or optical connector.
This can help exclude contamination as the cause of signal loss.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Precautions for Overload-caused Burnt OAs
● When using an OTDR to test the connectivity or attenuation of a fiber
channel, disconnect the optical fiber from the OA. Otherwise, the OA may be
burnt.
● When performing a self-loop test, use an optical attenuator if necessary. Do
not loosen the optical connector instead.
● If an OA is directly connected to an optical module, ensure that the output
power of the OA does not exceed the overload threshold (0 dBm) of the
optical module.

Other Precautions
An optical connector must be horizontally inserted into a receptacle to avoid
damages to the receptacle.


3.4.3 40Gbps QSFP+ Optical Module

3.4.3.1 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1271~1331nm-10km-commercial

Table 3-42 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1271~1331nm-10km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-
SMF-1271~1331nm-10km-commercial

Part Number 02310WUT

Model OMXD30009

Form factor QSFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ba, 40GBASE-LR4

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8436

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 41.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1271 nm
1291 nm
1311 nm
1331 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1264.5 nm - 1277.5 nm
1284.5 nm - 1297.5 nm
1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm
1324.5 nm - 1337.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 2.3 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 3.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -7 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: -4 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1264.5 nm - 1277.5 nm
1284.5 nm - 1297.5 nm
1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm
1324.5 nm - 1337.5 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -11.5 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: 2.3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description



3.4.3.2 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial

Table 3-43 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-
MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial

Part Number 02310WUU

Model OMXD30010

Form factor QSFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ba, 40GBASE-SR4

Connector type MPO-12

Optical fiber type MMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8436

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 41.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km(OM3)
0.15 km(OM4)

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 0.5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -7.6 dBm
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: -5.6 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -9.5 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: 0.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value.



3.4.3.3 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial

Table 3-44 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-
SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial

Part Number 02311NUA

Model OSM010N11

Form factor QSFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ba, 40GBASE-LR4

Connector type MPO-12

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8436

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Transmission rate [bit/s] 4x9.95328 Gbit/s
4x10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1355 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 0.5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -8.2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1355 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -12.6 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: 0.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



3.4.4 50Gbps QSFP28 Optical Module

3.4.4.1 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-10km-commercial

Table 3-45 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-10km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-10km-
commercial

Part Number 02311YNR

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Model OSL010N01

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3cd, 50GBASE-LR

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
CE Class B

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 53.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1311 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4.2 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -1.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -8.9 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -8.9 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 4.2 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

NOTE
1. The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. If the module needs to reach
the nominal data, the board FEC function must be enabled.
2. The optical power read by the device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical
power.
3. When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with a WDM device, the 1+1
protection switching duration on the client side of the WDM device is longer than 50 ms.



3.4.4.2 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-40km-commercial

Table 3-46 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-40km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-40km-
commercial

Part Number 02312AXF

Model QSFP28-50G-1311nm-40km-SM

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3cd, 50GBASE-ER

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
CE Class B

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 53.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1311 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 8 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) 9 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 1.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) 4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -15 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value.
If the module needs to reach the nominal data, the board FEC function must be enabled.
1. To keep the optical module running stably for a long time, set the receive optical power
less than -4 dBm. (According to IEEE 802.3, if the receive optical power exceeds -2.3 dBm,
the optical module may be permanently damaged.)
2. Before connecting the optical module, you are advised to use the optical power meter to
measure the receive optical power (P). If P is less than -4 dBm, the optical module can be
directly connected. If P is greater than -4 dBm, add an appropriate attenuator at the receive
end to ensure that P is less than -4 dBm. Alternatively, add an appropriate attenuator (the
recommended value is no less than 10 dB) before the optical module is connected, and
then adjust the attenuator according to the actual situation to prevent the module from
being damaged.
3. If the pigtail loopback or short-distance connection of the optical module is used, the
attenuator must be added. It is recommended that the attenuator be greater than or equal
to 10 dB.
4. When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with a WDM device, the 1+1
protection switching duration on the client side of the WDM device is longer than 50 ms.



3.4.4.3 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1300.05nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-47 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1300.05nm-80km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Module name 50Gbps-QSFP28-
SMF-1295.56~1300.05nm-80km-
commercial

Part Number 02312MLF

Model QSFP28-50G-1310nm-80km-SM

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard Huawei Define

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 51.5625 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1295.56 nm
1300.05 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 6.5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] per lane: -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: -3.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
1. The optical power is subject to the OMA. To achieve the nominal optical power, the FEC
function must be enabled on the board and G.652 fibers must be used.
2. The optical power of the optical module read on the device is the average optical power,
not the OMA optical power.
3. This module can be connected only to optical modules with the same BOM number.



3.4.5 50Gbps QSFP28 BIDI Optical Module


3.4.5.1 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1331nm(Tx)/1271nm(Rx)-10km-commercial

Table 3-48 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1331nm(Tx)/1271nm(Rx)-10km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1331nm(Tx)/
1271nm(Rx)-10km-commercial

Part Number 02312EVV

Model QSFP28-50G-BIDI-10km-SM-1

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3bm-2015, 50GBASE-BR10

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(after FEC)
<2x10E-4(before FEC)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 84
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 53.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1331 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1324.5 nm - 1337.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4.2 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -1.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1264.5 nm - 1277.5 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -8.9 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 4.2 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
1. The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. If the module needs to reach
the nominal data, the board FEC function must be enabled.
2. The optical power read by the device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical
power.
3. When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with a WDM device, the 1+1
protection switching duration on the client side of the WDM device is longer than 50 ms.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.5.2 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1271nm(Tx)/1331nm(Rx)-10km-commercial

Table 3-49 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1271nm(Tx)/1331nm(Rx)-10km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1271nm(Tx)/
1331nm(Rx)-10km-commercial

Part Number 02312EVW

Model QSFP28-50G-BIDI-10km-SM-2

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3bm-2015, 50GBASE-BR10

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(after FEC)
<2x10E-4(before FEC)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 53.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1271 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1264.5 nm - 1277.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4.2 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -1.5 dBm
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1324.5 nm - 1337.5 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -8.9 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 4.2 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
1. The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. If the module needs to reach
the nominal data, the board FEC function must be enabled.
2. The optical power read by the device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical
power.
3. When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with a WDM device, the 1+1
protection switching duration on the client side of the WDM device is longer than 50 ms.



3.4.5.3 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1295nm(Tx)/1309nm(Rx)-40km-commercial

Table 3-50 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1295nm(Tx)/1309nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1295nm(Tx)/
1309nm(Rx)-40km-commercial

Part Number 02312EVX

Model QSFP28-50G-BIDI-40km-SM-2

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3bm-2015, 50GBASE-BR40

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(after FEC)
<2x10E-4(before FEC)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 53.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1295 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 8 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) 9 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 1.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) 4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -15 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -13.5 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

NOTE
The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. If the module needs to reach the
nominal data, the board FEC function must be enabled.
The optical power read by the device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical
power.
1. To keep the optical module running stably for a long time, set the receive optical power
less than -4 dBm. (According to IEEE 802.3, if the receive optical power exceeds -2.3 dBm,
the optical module may be permanently damaged.)
2. Before connecting the optical module, you are advised to use the optical power meter to
measure the receive optical power (P). If P is less than -4 dBm, the optical module can be
directly connected. If P is greater than -4 dBm, add an appropriate attenuator at the receive
end to ensure that P is less than -4 dBm. Alternatively, add an appropriate attenuator (the
recommended value is no less than 10 dB) before the optical module is connected, and
then adjust the attenuator according to the actual situation to prevent the module from
being damaged.
3. If the pigtail loopback or short-distance connection of the optical module is used, the
attenuator must be added. It is recommended that the attenuator be greater than or equal
to 10 dB.
4. When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with a WDM device, the 1+1
protection switching duration on the client side of the WDM device is longer than 50 ms.



3.4.5.4 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1309nm(Tx)/1295nm(Rx)-40km-commercial

Table 3-51 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1309nm(Tx)/1295nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1309nm(Tx)/
1295nm(Rx)-40km-commercial

Part Number 02312EVY

Model QSFP28-50G-BIDI-40km-SM-1

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3bm-2015, 50GBASE-BR40

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(after FEC)
<2x10E-4(before FEC)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 89
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 53.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1309 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 8 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) 9 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 1.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) 4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -15 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -13.5 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 90
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

NOTE
The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. If the module needs to reach the
nominal data, the board FEC function must be enabled.
The optical power read by the device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical
power.
1. To keep the optical module running stably for a long time, set the receive optical power
less than -4 dBm. (According to IEEE 802.3, if the receive optical power exceeds -2.3 dBm,
the optical module may be permanently damaged.)
2. Before connecting the optical module, you are advised to use the optical power meter to
measure the receive optical power (P). If P is less than -4 dBm, the optical module can be
directly connected. If P is greater than -4 dBm, add an appropriate attenuator at the receive
end to ensure that P is less than -4 dBm. Alternatively, add an appropriate attenuator (the
recommended value is no less than 10 dB) before the optical module is connected, and
then adjust the attenuator according to the actual situation to prevent the module from
being damaged.
3. If the pigtail loopback or short-distance connection of the optical module is used, the
attenuator must be added. It is recommended that the attenuator be greater than or equal
to 10 dB.
4. When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with a WDM device, the 1+1
protection switching duration on the client side of the WDM device is longer than 50 ms.



3.4.6 100Gbps QSFP28 Optical Module


3.4.6.1 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial

Table 3-52 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-
MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial

Part Number 02311NTY

Model OMND10N13

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3bm, 100GBASE-SR4

Connector type MPO-12

Optical fiber type MMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <5x10E-5

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 103.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.07 km(OM3)
0.1 km(OM4)

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 2.4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -8.4 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: -6.4 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -10.3 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: 2.4 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
1. If the module needs to reach the nominal data, the board FEC function must be enabled.
2. The BER 5x10E - 5 is the data that is not enabled by FEC, so that 1x10E - 12 can be
reached after FEC .
3. The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. The optical power read by the
device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical power.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 92
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.6.2 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1271~1331nm-2km-commercial

Table 3-53 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1271~1331nm-2km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-
SMF-1271~1331nm-2km-commercial

Part Number 02311QDH

Model OSN020N15

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard 100G CWDM4 MSA

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <5x10E-5

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 103.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 2 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1271 nm
1291 nm
1311 nm
1331 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1264.5 nm - 1277.5 nm
1284.5 nm - 1297.5 nm
1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm
1324.5 nm - 1337.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 2.5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -6.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1264.5 nm - 1277.5 nm
1284.5 nm - 1297.5 nm
1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm
1324.5 nm - 1337.5 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -10 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: 2.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
1. If the module needs to reach the nominal data, the board FEC function must be enabled.
2. The BER 5x10E - 5 is the data that is not enabled by FEC, so that 1x10E - 12 can be
reached after FEC .



3.4.6.3 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1310nm-30km(NO FEC)-40km(FEC)-
commercial

Table 3-54 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1310nm-30km(NO FEC)-40km(FEC)-
commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-
SMF-1310nm-30km(NO
FEC)-40km(FEC)-commercial

Part Number 02312AUE

Model OSN030N05

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3ba, 100GBASE-ER4

Connector type LC


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 94
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <5x10E-5

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 103.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km(FEC)
30 km(NO FEC)

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1295.56 nm
1300.05 nm
1304.58 nm
1309.14 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 2.9 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -2.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 0.1 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 95
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -21.4 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: -3.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
1. If the module needs to reach 40 km, the board FEC function must be enabled. Otherwise,
it can reach only 30 km.
2. The BER 5x10E - 5 is the data obtained with FEC not enabled. After FEC is enabled, 1x10E
- 12 can be reached.
3. In 30 km application, the BER can reach 1x10E - 12.
4. The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. The optical power read by the
device is the average value, not the OMA optical power.



3.4.6.4 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-commercial
(02312BSS)

Table 3-55 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-
SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-
commercial

Part Number 02312BSS

Model OSN010N24

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3ba, 100GBASE-LR4

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 96
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Transmission rate [bit/s] 103.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1295.56 nm
1300.05 nm
1304.58 nm
1309.14 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -4.3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: -1.3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 4 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -8.6 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: 4.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. The optical power read by the
device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical power.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.6.5 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-56 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-80km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-
SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-80km-
commercial

Part Number 02312NCX

Model QSFP28-100G-1310-80km-SM

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard Huawei Define

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 103.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1295.56 nm
1300.05 nm
1304.58 nm
1309.14 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 6.5 dBm
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] per lane: -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: -3.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
1. To achieve the nominal value, the FEC function must be enabled on the board and G.652
fibers must be used.
2. The BER 5x10E-5 is the data when FEC is disabled. After FEC is enabled, the BER can
reach 1x10E-12.
3. When the optical module is used for 80 km transmission, it must be interconnected with
Huawei optical modules of the same model.



3.4.6.6 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-40km-commercial

Table 3-57 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-40km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-
SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-40km-
commercial

Part Number 02312NVQ

Model QSFP28-100G-1310-40km-SM

Form factor QSFP28

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Application standard IEEE 802.3 100GBASE-ER4

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 103.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1295.56 nm
1300.05 nm
1304.58 nm
1309.14 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 2.9 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -2.9 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 0.1 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 100
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] per lane: -20.9 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -21.4 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: -3.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
When an optical module is installed on an interface, the FEC function on the interface is
disabled by default. Pay attention to the FEC status of the peer interface during
interconnection.



3.4.6.7 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-commercial
(02313SWA)

Table 3-58 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-
SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-
commercial

Part Number 02313SWA

Model OSN010N24

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3ba, 100GBASE-LR4

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 103.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 101
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1295.56 nm
1300.05 nm
1304.58 nm
1309.14 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -4.3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: -1.3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 4 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -8.6 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: 4.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. The optical power read by the
device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical power.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 102
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.6.8 100Gbps-QSFP28-1310nm-10km-commercial

Table 3-59 100Gbps-QSFP28-1310nm-10km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 100Gbps-QSFP28-1310nm-10km-
commercial

Part Number 02314GYE

Model OSN010N22

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3cd, 100GBASE-LR1

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-4

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
CE Class B

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 106.25 Gbit/s(PAM4)

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4.8 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) 4.8 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -1.9 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -1.9 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 103
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -6.1 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -6.1 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 4.8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
1. The optical power is subject to the OMA optical power. To reach the nominal value, the
FEC function of the optical module must be enabled.
2. The optical power of an optical module displayed on the device is the average optical
power, not the OMA optical power.
3. When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with WDM equipment, the
WDM client-side 1+1 protection switching time is greater than 50 ms.



3.4.7 400Gbps QSFP-DD Optical Module


3.4.7.1 400Gbps(8*56Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial

Table 3-60 400Gbps(8*56Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 400Gbps(8*56Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-
SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial

Part Number 02312HCM

Model OSK010N02

Form factor QSFP-DD

Application standard IEEE802.3 bs-2017

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(after FEC)
<2.4E-4(before FEC)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 104
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options QSFP-DD MSA

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 425 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1273.54 nm
1277.89 nm
1282.26 nm
1286.66 nm
1295.56 nm
1300.05 nm
1304.58 nm
1309.14 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1272.55 nm ~ 1274.54 nm
1276.89 nm ~ 1278.89 nm
1281.25 nm ~ 1283.27 nm
1285.65 nm ~ 1287.68 nm
1294.53 nm ~ 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm ~ 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm ~ 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm ~ 1310.19 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5.3 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) 5.7 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2.8 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) 0.2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Modulation mode -

Receiver Optical Characteristics


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 105
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1272.55 nm ~ 1274.54 nm
1276.89 nm ~ 1278.89 nm
1281.25 nm ~ 1283.27 nm
1285.65 nm ~ 1287.68 nm
1294.53 nm ~ 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm ~ 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm ~ 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm ~ 1310.19 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -10.1 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -7.1 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 5.3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with WDM equipment, the
protection switching time of WDM client-side 1+1 protection is greater than 50 ms.



3.4.7.2 400Gbps(8*56Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial

Table 3-61 400Gbps(8*56Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 400Gbps(8*56Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-
SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial

Part Number 02312YQG

Model OSK040N02

Form factor QSFP-DD

Application standard IEEE802.3 bs-2017

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(after FEC)
<2.4E-4(before FEC)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options QSFP-DD MSA

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 106
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 425 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1273.54 nm
1277.89 nm
1282.26 nm
1286.66 nm
1295.56 nm
1300.05 nm
1304.58 nm
1309.14 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1272.55 nm ~ 1274.54 nm
1276.89 nm ~ 1278.89 nm
1281.25 nm ~ 1283.27 nm
1285.65 nm ~ 1287.68 nm
1294.53 nm ~ 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm ~ 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm ~ 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm ~ 1310.19 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5.6 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) 6.4 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -0.6 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) 2.4 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6 dB

Modulation mode -

Receiver Optical Characteristics


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 107
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1272.55 nm ~ 1274.54 nm
1276.89 nm ~ 1278.89 nm
1281.25 nm ~ 1283.27 nm
1285.65 nm ~ 1287.68 nm
1294.53 nm ~ 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm ~ 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm ~ 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm ~ 1310.19 nm

Minimum Rx optical power (AVG) -18.6 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Rx optical power (AVG) -4.4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Rx optical power (OMA) -3.6 dBm
[dBm]

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -18.6 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -16.1 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -4.4 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
When the board is used for 40 km transmission, it must be interconnected with a Huawei
optical module of the same model.
When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with WDM equipment, the
protection switching time of WDM client-side 1+1 protection is greater than 50 ms.



3.4.7.3 400Gbps-QSFP-DD-SMF-1528.773~1567.133nm-commercial

Table 3-62 400Gbps-QSFP-DD-SMF-1528.773~1567.133nm-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 400Gbps-QSFP-DD-
SMF-1528.773~1567.133nm-
commercial

Part Number 02313GSB

Model OSK080N03

Form factor QSFP-DD

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 108
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Application standard IEEE802.3 cw

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-15(after FEC)
<1.25E-2(before FEC)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options QSFP-DD MSA

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 478.75 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1528.773nm~1567.133nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1528.773nm~1567.133nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -6 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -10 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] -

Modulation mode 400G DP-16QAM

Number of tunable channels 48/64

Channel spacing [GHz] 75GHz/100GHz

Center frequency deviation [GHz] ±1.8 GHz

Tx channel tuning time [s] 180s

Output optical power in case of laser ≤-20 dBm
shutdown [dBm]

Receiver Optical Characteristics


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1528.773nm~1567.133nm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

FEC mode CFEC
RS-FEC

Rx optical power range [dBm] -12 dBm ~ 0 dBm

Minimum OSNR (back-to-back&EOL) 26 dB
[dB]

CD tolerance [ps/nm] 0 ps/nm ~ 2400 ps/nm

PMD tolerance [ps] 10 ps@0.5 dB OSNR penalty

PDL tolerance [dB] 3.5 with ≤ 1.3 dB OSNR penalty

SOP tolerance [krad/s] 50 krad/s@0.3dB penalty

NOTE
1. After being switched to the 400G ZR mode, modules with part numbers 02314MEF and
02314PXP cannot interconnect with this optical module.
2. Only the single-span application is supported. This optical module needs to be used with
the fiber amplifier module.
3. When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with WDM equipment, the
WDM client-side 1+1 protection switching time is greater than 50 ms.
4. According to the 400G ZR protocol, the hot start time of a port with a 400G ZR optical
module is less than 180s, and the cold start time is less than 200s.



3.4.7.4 400Gbps(4*100Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-SMF-1310nm-2km-commercial

Table 3-63 400Gbps(4*100Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-SMF-1310nm-2km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 400Gbps(4*100Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-
SMF-1310nm-2km-commercial

Part Number 02313KLT

Model OSK002N01

Form factor QSFP-DD

Application standard IEEE802.3 bs-2017

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 110
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1E-4(before FEC)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options QSFP-DD MSA

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 425 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 2 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1271 nm
1291 nm
1311 nm
1331 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1264.5 nm ~ 1277.5 nm
1284.5 nm ~ 1297.5 nm
1304.5 nm ~ 1317.5 nm
1324.5 nm ~ 1337.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 3.5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 3.7 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -3.3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: -0.3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Modulation mode -

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1264.5 nm ~ 1277.5 nm
1284.5 nm ~ 1297.5 nm
1304.5 nm ~ 1317.5 nm
1324.5 nm ~ 1337.5 nm

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Rx optical power (AVG) per lane: -7.3 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Rx optical power (AVG) per lane: 3.5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Rx optical power (OMA) per lane: -7.6 dBm
[dBm]

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] per lane: -7.6 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] −4.6dBm, SECQ − 6.0dB

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: 3.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
During link deployment, focus on the reflection indicators of each node. The discrete
reflection indicators must meet the IEEE specifications.
IEEE 802.3cu standard discrete reflection requirements: For a 400G FR4 link with six
reflection points, each reflection point must be less than or equal to –38 dB. For a 400G
FR4 link with eight reflection points, each reflection point must be less than or equal to –40
dB. For a 400G FR4 link with 10 reflection points, each reflection point must be less than or
equal to –41 dB.
When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with WDM equipment, the
protection switching time of WDM client-side 1+1 protection is greater than 50 ms.



3.4.7.5 400Gbps(8*50Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial

Table 3-64 400Gbps(8*50Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 400Gbps(8*50Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-
MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial

Part Number 02313KST

Model QSFP-DD-400G-850-0.1km

Form factor QSFP-DD

Application standard IEEE802.3 bs-2017

Connector type MPO-16

Optical fiber type MMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <5E-6(Pre-FEC)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 112
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options QSFP-DD MSA

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 425 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 100m@OM5
100m@OM4
70m@OM3

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm~ 860 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -6.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: -4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3 dB

Modulation mode PAM4

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm~ 860 nm

Minimum Rx optical power (AVG) per lane: -8.4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Rx optical power (AVG) per lane: 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Rx optical power (OMA) per lane: 3 dBm
[dBm]

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] per lane: -7 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: −6.5 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: 4 dBm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 113
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.4.7.6 400Gbps-QSFP-DD-SMF-1547nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-65 400Gbps-QSFP-DD-SMF-1547nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 400Gbps-QSFP-DD-
SMF-1547nm-80km-commercial

Part Number 02313LHH

Model OSK080N04

Form factor QSFP-DD

Application standard IEEE802.3 cw

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1E-15(after FEC)
<1.25E-2(before FEC)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C (32°F to 158°F)

DDM options QSFP-DD MSA

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 478.75 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1547.715 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1547.715 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -6 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -10 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] -

Modulation mode 400G DP-16QAM

Number of tunable channels -

Channel spacing [GHz] -

Center frequency deviation [GHz] ±1.8 GHz

Tx channel tuning time [s] 180s

Output optical power in case of laser ≤-20 dBm
shutdown [dBm]

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1547.715 nm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

FEC mode CFEC
RS-FEC

Rx optical power range [dBm] -12 dBm ~ 0 dBm: OSNR>=26dB
-20 dBm ~ 0 dBm: OSNR>=34dB

Minimum OSNR (back-to-back&EOL) 26 dB
[dB]

PMD tolerance [ps] 10 ps@0.5 dB OSNR penalty

PDL tolerance [dB] 2.5 with ≤ 0.8 dB OSNR penalty

SOP tolerance [krad/s] 50 krad/s@0.3dB penalty


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 115
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

NOTE
After being switched to the 400G ZR mode, modules with part numbers 02314MEF and
02314PXP cannot interconnect with this optical module.
Only single-span applications are supported.
1. If the link loss is less than 22 dB (standard-defined), site survey is not required and an
OA only needs to be configured at the transmit end.
2. If the transmission distance ranges from 80 km to 120 km, site survey is required to
determine the OA configuration scheme:
(1) If the link loss is less than or equal to 24 dB, an OA needs to be configured only at the
transmit end.
(2) If the link loss is greater than 24 dB but less than or equal to 28 dB, an OA needs to be
configured at both the transmit and receive ends, and the receive optical power threshold
of the involved module needs to be switched using a command.
(3) If the link loss is greater than 28 dB, optimize the link to ensure that the loss is less
than 28 dB.
(4) When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with WDM equipment, the
protection switching time of WDM client-side 1+1 protection is greater than 50 ms.
(5) According to the 400G ZR protocol, the hot start time of a port with a 400G ZR optical
module is less than 180s, and the cold start time is less than 200s.



3.4.7.7 400Gbps(4*100Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-SMF-1310nm-6km-commercial

Table 3-66 400Gbps(4*100Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-SMF-1310nm-6km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 400Gbps(4*100Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-
SMF-1310nm-6km-commercial

Part Number 02314LKG

Model OSK006NO1

Form factor QSFP-DD

Application standard IEEE802.3 bs-2017

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) 1E-6(Pre-FEC)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options QSFP-DD MSA

Environment standard RoHS


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 116
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 425 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 6 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1271nm
1291nm
1311nm
1331nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1264.5nm~1277.5nm
1284.5nm~1297.5nm
1304.5nm~1317.5nm
1324.5nm~1337.5nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5.1 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) 4.4 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2.7 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) 0.3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1264.5nm~1277.5nm
1284.5nm~1297.5nm
1304.5nm~1317.5nm
1324.5nm~1337.5nm

Minimum Rx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Rx optical power (AVG) 5.1 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Rx optical power (OMA) 4.4 dBm
[dBm]

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -9.8 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -6.8 dBm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 5.1 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The optical module needs to be interconnected with the optical module of the same model.
When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with WDM equipment, the WDM
client-side 1+1 protection switching time is greater than 50 ms.
Reflectance indicators of each node must be given attention during link deployment.
Discrete reflectance indicators must comply with IEEE specifications.
Discrete reflectance requirements of the IEEE 802.3cu standard: For a 400G LR4-6 link with
six reflection points, the discrete reflectance of each reflection point must be less than or
equal to –35 dB. For a 400G LR4-6 link with eight reflection points, the discrete reflectance
of each reflection point must be less than or equal to –37 dB. For a 400G LR4-6 link with
10 reflection points, the discrete reflectance of each reflection point must be less than or
equal to –39 dB.



3.4.7.8 High Speed Transceiver,QSFP-DD,Tunable C-band
191.3-196.1THz,478.75Gb/s,-10dBm,-6dBm,-12dBm,LC,SMF

Table 3-67 High Speed Transceiver,QSFP-DD,Tunable C-band
191.3-196.1THz,478.75Gb/s,-10dBm,-6dBm,-12dBm,LC,SMF specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name High Speed Transceiver,QSFP-
DD,Tunable C-band
191.3-196.1THz,478.75Gb/
s,-10dBm,-6dBm,-12dBm,LC,SMF

Part Number 02314MEF

Model OSK080N11

Form factor QSFP-DD

Application standard IEEE802.3 cw / IEEE 802.3 bs

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-15(after FEC)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options QSFP-DD MSA

Environment standard RoHS


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 118
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Security standard TUV: EN 62368-1, EN 60825-1;
CB: IEC60825-1, IEC60825-2;
NRTL: CAN/CSA C22.2 NO.62368-1-12
* UL 62368-1;
FDA: 21CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,
Notice NO.56;

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 478.75 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 400G ZR:80km(with OA)
400G ZR+:80km(single-span)/
480km(six-span)

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1528.773nm~1567.133nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1528.773nm~1567.133nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -6 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -10 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] -

Modulation mode 400G DP-16QAM

Number of tunable channels 48 channels (100 GHz spacing)/64
channels (75 GHz spacing)/768
channels (6.125 GHz spacing)/384
channels (12.5 GHz spacing)/192
channels (25GHz spacing)/96 channels
(50GHz spacing)/

Channel spacing [GHz] 75GHz/100GHz/6.25GHz/12.5GHz/
25GHz/50GHz

Center frequency deviation [GHz] ±1.8 GHz

Tx channel tuning time [s] 180s

Output optical power in case of laser ≤-20 dBm
shutdown [dBm]

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 119
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1528.773nm~1567.133nm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

FEC mode CFEC for ZR
OFEC for ZR+

Rx optical power range [dBm] -12 dBm ~ 0 dBm (Colored light
mode)
-20 dBm ~ 0 dBm (Gray light mode)

Minimum OSNR (back-to-back&EOL) 24 dB
[dB]

CD tolerance [ps/nm] 400ZR 2400 ps/nm
400ZR+ 20000 ps/nm
300ZR+ 40000 ps/nm
200ZR+ 50000 ps/nm
100ZR+ 100000 ps/nm

PMD tolerance [ps] 20 ps@0.5 dB OSNR penalty

PDL tolerance [dB] 3.5 with ≤ 1.3 dB OSNR penalty

SOP tolerance [krad/s] 50 krad/s@0.5dB penalty

NOTE
1. The 400G ZR mode supports only single-span applications. This optical module must be
used with an OA module.
2. The 400G ZR+ mode supports multi-span applications (six spans at most).
3. When working in 400G ZR mode, the module cannot interconnect with modules with
part numbers 02313GRH, 02313LHH, and 02313GSB.
4. The optical module supports eight working modes. The two ends must work in the same
mode. If the two ends work in different modes, the working status of the interconnected
link is abnormal.
When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with WDM equipment, the WDM
client-side 1+1 protection switching time is greater than 50 ms.
Appendix: Eight modes supported by the optical module:
400G ZR colored light, 400G ZR gray light, 4 x 100G ZR colored light, 400G ZR+, 4 x 100G
ZR+, 3 x 100G ZR+, 2 x 100G ZR+, and 1 x 100G ZR+




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 120
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.7.9 400G Transceiver,QSFP-DD,Tunable C-band 191.3-196.1THz,478.75Gb/
s,0dBm,4dBm,-20dBm,LC,ITU-T G.652(SMF)

Table 3-68 400G Transceiver,QSFP-DD,Tunable C-band 191.3-196.1THz,478.75Gb/
s,0dBm,4dBm,-20dBm,LC,ITU-T G.652(SMF) specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 400G Transceiver,QSFP-DD,Tunable C-
band 191.3-196.1THz,478.75Gb/
s,0dBm,4dBm,-20dBm,LC,ITU-T
G.652(SMF)

Part Number 02314PXP

Model OSK080N12

Form factor QSFP-DD

Application standard Open ZR+ MSA,OIF 400ZR MSA,IEEE
802.3

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) OFEC(400GZR+ DWDM/300G ZR+
DWDM/200GZR+ DWDM/100GZR+
DWDM): <1x10E-15(after
FEC);<2E-2(before FEC)
CFEC(400GZR DWDM/400GZR Single):
<1x10E-15(after FEC);<1.25E-2(before
FEC)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 75°C (32°F to 167°F)

DDM options QSFP-DD MSA

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard TUV: EN 62368-1, EN 60825-1
CB: IEC60825-1, IEC60825-2
NRTL: CAN/CSA C22.2 NO.62368-1-12
* UL 62368-1
FDA: 21CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,
Notice NO.56;

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 121
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Transmission rate [bit/s] 400GZR DWDM/400GZR Single:
478.75Gbps,59.84375GBd,±20ppm
400GZR+ DWDM:
481.1Gbps,60.139GBd,±20ppm
300GZR+ DWDM:
360.8Gbps,60.139GBd,±20ppm
200GZR+ DWDM:
240.6Gbps,60.139GBd,±20ppm
100GZR+ DWDM:
120.3Gbps,30.07GBd,±20ppm

Target transmission distance [km] 400GZR DWDM/400GZR Single: 80
km/120 km(with OA)
400GZR+ DWDM: 480 km
300GZR+ DWDM: 600 km
200GZR+ DWDM:1000km
100GZR+ DWDM:2000km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] DWDM: 1528.773 nm~1567.133 nm
Single wavelength: 1547.715 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] DWDM: 1528.773nm~1567.133 nm
Single wavelength: 1547.715 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 400G ZR Single: 5dbm;(typical value
[dBm] 4dbm, untunable)
400G ZR DWDM/400GZR+ DWDM/
300GZR+ DWDM/200GZR+ DWDM/
100GZR+ DWDM: 2dBm(Tunable
range:-10~1dbm)

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 400G ZR Single: 3dbm;(typical value
[dBm] 4dbm, untunable)
400G ZR DWDM/400GZR+ DWDM/
300GZR+ DWDM/200GZR+ DWDM/
100GZR+ DWDM: -11dBm(Tunable
range:-10~1dbm)

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] -


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 122
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Modulation mode 400G(400GZR Single/400GZR DWDM/
400GZR+ DWDM): DP-16QAM
300G(300GZR+ DWDM): DP-8QAM
200G(200GZR+ DWDM): DP-QPSK
100G(100GZR+ DWDM): DP-QPSK

Number of tunable channels V800R023C00SPC500:
48 channels (100 GHz spacing)
64 channels (75 GHz spacing)
V800R024C00SPC500:
1536 channels (3.125 GHz spacing)
768 channels (6.25 GHz spacing)
384 channels (12.5 GHz spacing)
192 channels (25GHz spacing)
96 channels (50GHz spacing)
144 channels (33 GHz spacing)

Channel spacing [GHz] DWDM:
V800R023C00SPC500:
75 GHz/100 GHz
V800R024C00SPC500:
3.125 GHz/6.25 GHz/12.5 GHz/25
GHz/50 GHz/33 GHz

Center frequency deviation [GHz] ±1.8 GHz

Tx channel tuning time [s] 180 s

Output optical power in case of laser ≤-20 dBm
shutdown [dBm]

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] DWDM: 1528.773nm~1567.133 nm
Single wavelength: 1547.715 nm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

FEC mode ZR(400GZR Single/400GZR
DWDM):CFEC
ZR+(400GZR+ DWDM/300GZR+
DWDM/200GZR+ DWDM/100GZR+
DWDM):OFEC


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 123
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx optical power range [dBm] Gray light mode:
400GZR Single:-20 dBm ~ 0 dBm
Colored light mode:
400GZR DWDM:-12~0 dBm
400GZR+ DWDM:-12~0 dBm
300GZR+ DWDM:-15~0 dBm
200GZR+ DWDM:-18~0 dBm
100GZR+ DWDM:-18~0 dBm

Minimum OSNR (back-to-back&EOL) 400ZR DWDM:26 dB/0.1 nm
[dB] 400ZR+ DWDM:24 dB/0.1 nm
300ZR+ DWDM:21 dB/0.1 nm
200ZR+ DWDM:16 dB/0.1nm
100ZR+ DWDM:12.5 dB/0.1nm

CD tolerance [ps/nm] 400ZR DWDM: 2400 ps/nm
400ZR+ DWDM: 20000 ps/nm
300ZR+ DWDM: 40000 ps/nm
200ZR+ DWDM: 50000 ps/nm
100ZR+ DWDM: 100000 ps/nm

PMD tolerance [ps] 20 ps@0.5 dB OSNR penalty

PDL tolerance [dB] 3.5 with ≤ 1.3 dB OSNR penalty

SOP tolerance [krad/s] 50 krad/s@0.5dB penalty


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 124
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

NOTE
1. Nine modes supported by the optical module:
400G ZR DWDM, 400G ZR single, 4*100G ZR DWDM, 4*100G ZR single, 400G ZR+ DWDM,
4*100G ZR+ DWDM, 3*100G ZR+ DWDM, 2*100G ZR+ DWDM, 1*100G ZR+ DWDM. The
difference between the 4*100G ZR DWDM and 400G ZR DWDM modes lies in whether
board ports are split. The optical-layer parameters for optical modules in these two modes
are displayed as 400G ZR DWDM. The same applies to the 4*100G ZR single and 400G ZR
single modes. The optical-layer parameters for optical modules in 3*100G ZR+ DWDM,
2*100G ZR+ DWDM, and 1*100G ZR+ DWDM modes are displayed as 300G ZR+ DWDM,
200G ZR+ DWDM, and 100G ZR+DWDM, respectively.
2. The ZR mode supports only single-span applications, and the ZR+ mode supports multi-
span applications.
3. In ZR mode, the optical module cannot work with the 02313GRH, 02313LHH, or
02313GSB.
4. This type of optical module supports nine working modes. The optical modules on both
ends must work in the same mode. Otherwise, the working status of the interconnection
link is abnormal.
5. If this type of optical module is used to connect to WDM equipment, the WDM client-
side 1+1 protection switching time is greater than 50 ms.
6. Minimum channel spacing in different modes:
1*100G ZR+ DWDM: 50 GHz;
400G ZR DWDM/4*100G ZR DWDM/4*100G ZR+ DWDM/400G ZR+ DWDM/3*100G ZR+
DWDM/2*100G ZR+ DWDM: 75 GHz
4*100G ZR single/400G ZR single: Wavelength is not tunable.



3.4.8 Optical Amplifier Module

3.4.8.1 Optical Amplifier-QSFP28-SMF-1535nm~1547nm

Table 3-69 Optical Amplifier-QSFP28-SMF-1535nm~1547nm specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name Optical Amplifier-QSFP28-
SMF-1535nm~1547nm

Part Number 02313JCM

Model QSFP28-Amplifier-SM

Form factor QSFP28

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –5°C to +75°C (23°F to 167°F)

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 125
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard EN/IEC60825-1:2014;EN/
IEC62368-1:2014;UL 62368-1 Ed.2

ESD(HBM1) [V] 2000 V

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1547.715nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) +7 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1535.82 nm~1547.72 nm

Minimum Rx optical power (AVG) -29 dbm
[dBm]

NOTE
Works with 400G ZR optical modules.
1. When the transmission distance ranges from 40 km to 80 km and the insertion loss of
the optical link is less than 22 dB, the optical amplifier needs to be configured only at the
transmit end.
2. When the transmission distance ranges from 80 km to 120 km:
1. When the insertion loss of an optical link is less than or equal to 24 dB, an optical
amplifier needs to be configured only at the transmit end.
2. When the insertion loss of an optical link is greater than 24 dB but less than or equal to
28 dB, optical amplifiers must be configured at both the transmit and receive ends, and the
receive optical power threshold of the QSFP-DD optical module must be manually
modified.
3. If the insertion loss of an optical link is greater than 28 dB, the link needs to be
optimized to reduce the insertion loss to a value less than 28 dB.
Note: The optical amplifier module works at the physical layer. If the corresponding
physical port is steady on, it indicates that the optical amplifier module works normally and
no LOS alarm is reported. If the corresponding physical port is off, it indicates that the
optical amplifier module does not work normally or a LOS alarm is reported. If the status
of an amplifier module port is up, the amplifier module board is working properly and no
LOS alarm is reported. If the status of an amplifier module port is down, the amplifier
module board is not working properly or a LOS alarm is reported.



3.5 Cables

3.5.1 NetEngine 8000 F2A Power Cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 126
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.1.1 DC Power Cable
This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the DC power
cable.


NO TICE

Power cables are delivered according to default specifications. Power cables of
other specifications need to be purchased separately.
If the power cable length is more than 35 m (114.83 ft.), install a Power
Distribution Frame (PDF) close to the device.

Overview
A DC power cable connects to the power module of a device to supply power to
the device.

NO TE

Cable colors shown below are for reference only. The actual cable colors may vary
according to the requirements of the target country or customer.

Appearance

Figure 3-35 DC power cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 127
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-36 DC power connector


Figure 3-37 OT terminal


Figure 3-38 Heat-shrink tubing


Technical Specifications

Table 3-70 Technical specifications of DC power cables

Dista Part Description Fire Rating
nce Numb
from er
the
PDF
to the
Devic
e

Shorte 25030 Electronic|Electric Cable,450V/ IEC 60332-1,VW-1
r than 586 750V,H07Z-K
or UL3386,16mm^2,Blue,107A,LS
equal ZH Cable,VDE,UL
to 20
m

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 128
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Dista Part Description Fire Rating
nce Numb
from er
the
PDF
to the
Devic
e

25030 Electronic|Electric Cable,450V/ IEC 60332-1,VW-1
639 750V,H07Z-K
UL3386,16mm^2,Black,107A,L
SZH Cable,VDE,UL

25030 Electronic|Electric Cable,450V/ IEC 60332-1,VW-1
736 750V,H07Z-K
UL3386,10mm^2,Gray,80A,LS
ZH Cable,VDE,UL

25030 Electronic|Electric Cable,450V/ IEC 60332-1,VW-1
722 750V,H07Z-K
UL3386,16mm^2,Red,107A,LS
ZH Cable,VDE,UL

25032 Electronic|Electric IEC60332-1,IEC60332-3-22
790-00 Cable,1100V,Y(FR-
1 LSH),16mm^2,Blue,107A,For
India,BIS

25032 Electronic|Electric IEC60332-1,IEC60332-3-22
790 Cable,1100V,Y(FR-
LSH),16mm^2,Black,107A,For
India,BIS

Longe 25030 Electronic|Electric Cable,450V/ IEC 60332-1,VW-1
r than 695 750V,H07Z-K
20 m UL3386,25mm^2,Blue,138A,LS
and ZH Cable,VDE,UL
shorte
r than 25030 Electronic|Electric Cable,450V/ IEC 60332-1,VW-1
or 638 750V,H07Z-K
equal UL3386,25mm^2,Black,138A,L
to 35 SZH Cable,VDE,UL
m 25030 Electronic|Electric Cable,450V/ IEC 60332-1,VW-1
719 750V,H07Z-K
UL3386,25mm^2,Red,138A,LS
ZH Cable,VDE,UL

25030 Electronic|Electric Cable,450V/ IEC 60332-1,VW-1
717 750V,H07Z-K
UL3386,6mm^2,Gray,58A,LSZ
H Cable,VDE,UL


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 129
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Dista Part Description Fire Rating
nce Numb
from er
the
PDF
to the
Devic
e

25032 Electronic|Electric IEC60332-1,IEC60332-3-22
791 Cable,1100V,Y(FR-
LSH),25mm^2,Black,138A,For
India,BIS

25032 Electronic|Electric IEC60332-1,IEC60332-3-22
791-00 Cable,1100V,Y(FR-
1 LSH),25mm^2,Blue,138A,For
India,BIS


Table 3-71 Technical specifications of power cable terminals
Distance Part Descriptio Terminal Type
from the Number n
PDF to
the
Device

Shorter 02233NKF MPE Site Power Connector,2pin,48V,100A,Straight
than or Materials Female,16mm^2 Max (with Cord End
equal to Kit,NetEngi Terminal) and 25mm^2 Max(without
20 m ne 8000 Cord End Terminal)
F2A-8K36H Common Terminal,Single Cord End
16mm^2 Terminal,Conductor Cross Section
Package of 16mm^2,Length 24mm,Insertion Depth
Terminal 12mm,Green
for Single
Input DC Naked Crimping
Power Terminal,OT,16mm^2,M8,Tin
Cable Plating,Naked Ring Terminal


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 130
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Distance Part Descriptio Terminal Type
from the Number n
PDF to
the
Device

Longer 02233NKG MPE Site Power Connector,2pin,48V,100A,Straight
than 20 Materials Female,16mm^2 Max (with Cord End
m and Kit,NetEngi Terminal) and 25mm^2 Max(without
shorter ne 8000 Cord End Terminal)
than or F2A-8K36H Naked Crimping
equal to 25mm^2 Terminal,OT,25mm^2,M8,Tin
35 m Package of Plating,Naked Ring Terminal
Terminal
for Single
Input DC
Power
Cable


3.5.1.2 AC Power Cable
This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the AC power
cable.


NO TICE

Power cables are delivered according to default specifications. Power cables of
other specifications need to be purchased separately.

Overview
An AC power cable connects to the AC power module of a device to supply power
to the device.

NO TE

Cables must be in compliance with the standards of the destination country or region. The
actual cable type may vary according to the requirements of the target country or
customer.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 131
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-39 Connector C19 (PDU)


Figure 3-40 Connector C19 (wall-mounted)


Figure 3-41 Heat shrink tubing


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 132
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-72 Technical specifications of AC power cables in different countries or
regions (PDU)

Part Description Connecto Conne Leng Numb
Num r X1 ctor th er of
ber X2 Cores

0405 Power Cords Cable,China / C20SM C19SF 3 m 3
0422 Europe/America/Korea Multiple cores
Certificate AC Power
250V16A,3.0m,C20SM,H05VV-
F-1.5mm^2(3C)
+14SJT3(3C),C19SF,PDU Cable

0405 Power Cords Cable,Australia AC C20SM C19SF 3 m 3
0856 Power cores
250V16A,3.0m,C20SM,H05VV-
F-1.5^2(3C),C19SF,PDU Power
Cord

0405 Power Cords Cable,Japan AC C20SM C19SF 3 m 3
0855 Power cores
250V15A,3.0m,C20SM,VCTF-2.0^
2(3C),C19SF,PDU Power Cord



Table 3-73 Technical specifications of AC power cables in different countries or
regions (wall-mounted)

Part Description Connecto Conne Leng Numb
Num r X1 ctor th er of
ber X2 Cores

0404 Power cord,BS546 PM-IAM C19SF 3 m 3
4597 250V16A,3.0m,PM-IAM,H05VV- cores
F-1.5mm^2(3C),C19SF,250V,16A,
Black

0404 Power Cords Cable,Europe AC PFAM C19SF 3 m 3
4598 Power cores
250V16A,3.0m,PFAM,H05VVF-1.5
^2(3C),C19SF,Black

0404 Power Cords Cable,China AC PIAM C19SF 3 m 3
3396 Power cores
250V16A,3.0m,PIAM,227IEC53-2.
5^2(3C),C19SF,Black

0404 Power cord,Japan AC Power NEMA5-2 C19SF 3 m 3
4600 Cable,3.0m,NEMA5-20PAM,HVCT 0PAM cores
F-3.5mm^2(3C),C19SF,125V,20A,
Black

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 133
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Part Description Connecto Conne Leng Numb
Num r X1 ctor th er of
ber X2 Cores

0404 Power Cords Cable,North NEMA5-2 C19SF 3 m 3
4603 America AC Power 0PAM cores
125V20A,3.0m,NEMA5-20PAM,12
SJT(3C),C19SF,Black

0404 Power Cords Cable,Australia AC PISM C19SF 3 m 3
5184 Power cores
250V16A,3.0m,PISM,H05VVF-2.5^
2(3C),C19SF,Black

0415 Power Cords Cable,Brazil AC PN-ISM C19SF 3 m 3
0259 Power 250V16A,3.0m,PN- cores
ISM ,H05VVF-1.5^2(3C),C19SF,Bl
ack

0405 Power Cords Cable,Britain AC PG AM C19SF 3 m 3
0850 Power Cable,250V13A,3.0m,PG cores
AM,H05VV-F-1.5mm^2(3C),C19
SF,Black

0405 Power cord,India AC Power 250V PM-IIIAM C19SF 3 m 3
1074 16A,3m,PM-IIIAM,IS cores
694-1.5mm^2(3C),C19SF,250V,16
A,Black

0405 Power cord,South Africa AC PMAM C19SF 3 m 3
1079 Power cores
250V16A,3m,PMAM,H05VV-
F-1.5mm^2(3C),C19SF,250V,16A,
Black

0405 Power cord,Switzerland AC Power PJ-II SM C19SF 3 m 3
1322 Cable,3m,PJ-II SM,H05VV- cores
F-1.5mm^2(3C),C19SF,250V,16A

0405 Power cord,Taiwan AC PBSM C19SF 3 m 3
2139 125V15A,3.0m,PBSM,VCTFK3*2.0 cores
mm2(3C),C19SF,125V,15A,Black,B
SMI



3.5.2 Chassis Ground Cable

Overview

One end of a chassis ground cable is connected to the ground screw on the right-
side cabinet column, and the other end is connected to the ground screw on the
chassis.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 134
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure1 shows the appearance of chassis ground cable.

Figure 3-42 Appearance of chassis ground cable.


1. OT one-hole naked crimping connector

Connection

A ground cable grounds a device to protect it from lightning and electromagnetic
interference. A ground cable is connected to a chassis in the following way:

● The OT bare crimp terminal X1 connects to the ground point on the chassis.
● The OT bare crimp terminal X2 connects to the ground bar of the cabinet.

Technical Specifications

Table 3-74 Technical specifications of chassis ground cable

Dev Part Mo Description Con Connec Le Fire
ice Nu del nec tor X2 ngt Rating
Mo mb tor h
del er X1

Net 250 - Electronic|Electric OT OT 15 IEC
Engi 306 Cable,450V/750V,H07Z-K Ter Termina m 60332-
ne 98 UL3386,10mm^2,Yellow/ min l 1,VW-
800 Green,80A,LSZH al 1
0 Cable,VDE,UL
F2A
-8K 250 - Electronic|Electric OT OT 15 IEC603
36H 327 Cable,1100V,Y(FR- Ter Termina m 32-1,IE
89 LSH),10mm^2,Yellow/ min l C6033
Green,80A,For India,BIS al 2-3-22



3.5.3 Standard Serial Cable

This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the standard
serial cable.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 135
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Introduction
One end of the standard serial cable is a DB9 connector that is connected to the
serial port of a computer, and the other end is an RJ45 connector that is
connected to the standard console port of a router.

Appearance
Figure 3-43 shows the structure of a standard serial cable, and Table 3-75
describes the cable connections.

Figure 3-43 Standard serial cable (04040838 - Single Cable,Serial
Cable,3m,D9F,CC2P0.32PWG1U,MP8-VI,S3026V)


1 DB9 female 2 Network interface RJ45 W communication cable

Table 3-75 Connections of the standard serial cable
Start Point End Point Color

X1.2 X2.3 Black

X1.3 X2.6 Brown

X1.5 X2.5 Red




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 136
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-76 Technical specifications of a standard serial cable and a serial adapter
cable
Par Mod Description Connect Connector Cable Le Nu Fir
t el or X1 X2 Type ng mb e
Nu th er Rat
mb of ing
er Co
res

040 - Single D9F MP8-VI Twiste 3m 2 -
408 Cable,Serial d-Pair cor
38 Cable,3m,D9 Cable, es/
F,CC2P0.32P UL246 pai
WG1U,MP8- 4,0.32 r
VI,S3026V mm,28
AWG,2
Pairs,P
ANTO
NE
WARM
GRAY
1U


3.5.4 USB-to-Serial Cable

This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the USB-to-
serial cable.

Overview
The USB-to-serial cable uses a USB port to connect to a client device at one end
and uses two RJ45 connector-based serial ports (one standard and one non-
standard) to connect to a router at the other end. The pin assignments of the two
serial ports are different. For details, see Table 3-77.

Structure

Figure 3-44 Structure of the USB-to-serial cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 137
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Pin Assignments

Table 3-77 Pin assignments of the USB-to-serial cable

Wire Rela Core Cabl Start Conv End Cabl Core Rela Wire
No. tions Wire e Pin erter Pin e Wire tions No.
hip Colo Desc Desc Colo hip
r ripti ripti r
on on

W3- Twist Whit +5 V X1.1 USB- X2.6 RS23 Blue Twist W1-
Main ed e DC to- 2_RX ed Labe
Labe RS23 l 1
l Blue Data X1.2 2 X2.3 RS23 Whit (RS2
- conv 2_TX e 32)
Twist Oran Data X1.3 erter X2.5 GND Oran -
ed ge + ge

Whit GND X1.4 X3.5 RS23 Blue Twist W2-
e 2_RX ed Labe
l 2
- - - - - X3.8 RS23 Whit (Spe
2_TX e cial
- - - - - X3.4 GND Oran - RS23
ge 2)



Technical Specifications

Table 3-78 Technical specifications of the USB-to-serial cable

Part Description Connect Connect Cable
Number or X1 or X2 Length

0407185 Traditional Signal Cable,USB-to- USB-A MP8-II 1.5 m
1 Ethernet cable,1.5m,USB- (Male)
A(Male),CC2P0.48B(S),2*MP8-II




NO TICE

To use the USB-to-serial cable, you need to download the corresponding driver at
https://www.wch-ic.com/products/CH340.html? and configure the driver as
required.

3.5.5 Clock Cable (External Clock Mode, Delivery-Ready)

This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the clock cable.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 138
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Introduction
The external clock cables can be connected to the CLK, and CLK/TOD interfaces on
a device.

Structure
The 120-ohm trunk cable adopts the RJ45 connector. Figure 3-45 shows the
structure of the 120-ohm trunk cable.

Figure 3-45 120-ohm trunk cable


Pin Assignment

Table 3-79 Pin assignments of the 120-ohm trunk cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation

1 4 White Pair

2 5 Blue

3 6 Orange -

4 1 White Pair

5 2 Green

6 3 Brown -




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 139
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-80 Technical specifications of the 120-ohm trunk cable

Par Mo Description Co Co Cable Le Nu Fire
t del nne nn Type ng mb Ratin
Nu cto ect th er g
mb r or of
er X1 X2 Cor
es

040 - Trunk MP MP Twisted 3 2 IEC
404 Cable,3m,120ohm,1E1,0. 8-II 8-II -Pair m cor 60332
97 4mm,MP8- Cable,1 es/ -1
II,120CC4P0.4P430U(S), 20ohm, pair
MP8-II SEYVP,0
.4mm,2
040 - Trunk MP MP 6AWG, 15 2 IEC
402 Cable,15m,120ohm,1E1,0 8-II 8-II 4Pairs, m cor 60332
61 .4mm,MP8- Panton es/ -1
II,120CC4P0.4P430U(S), e 430U pair
MP8-II



3.5.6 Clock Cable (External Clock/External Time Mode,
Prepared Onsite)

Overview
A clock cable is used to connect the clock interface on a router to that on another
device. If equipped with only one main control board, a router can receive one-
channel 2 Mbit/s clock signals, one-channel 2 MHz clock signals, one-channel
DCLS time signals, or one-channel 1PPS+TOD time signals from the upstream
device and provides one-channel 2 Mbit/s clock signals, one-channel 2 MHz clock
signals, one-channel DCLS time signals, or one-channel 1PPS+TOD time signals to
the downstream device. If equipped with two main control boards, a router can
receive two-channel 2 Mbit/s clock signals, two-channel 2 MHz clock signals, two-
channel DCLS time signals, or two-channel 1PPS+TOD time signals from the
upstream device and provides two-channel 2 Mbit/s clock signals, two-channel 2
MHz clock signals, two-channel DCLS time signals, or two-channel 1PPS+TOD
time signals to the downstream device.
The clock cable features RJ45 connectors at both ends: one is used to connect to
the clock interface on the front panel of a main control board, and the other is
used to connect to the clock interface on an external device.
An RJ45 connector is used together with the 120-ohm trunk cable.

NO TE

The wire sequence of a trunk cable used as a clock cable differs from that of an ordinary
twisted pair cable.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

The 120-ohm clock cable uses the RJ45 connector. The following figure shows the
cable structure.

Figure 3-46 Appearance of the 120-ohm clock cable connector


Pin Assignments

Table 3-81 Pin assignments of the 120-ohm clock cable

Pin Rela Description
tion
ship External Clock External Time External Time Mode
Mode Mode (DCLS)
(1PPS + Time
Information)

X1.1 Twis Receive Not defined Not defined
ted negative for
CLK signals

X1.2 Receive positive Not defined Not defined
for CLK signals

X1.3 Twis Not defined Negative for IPPS Negative for DCLS
ted signals signals

X1.6 Not defined Positive for IPPS Positive for DCLS
signals signals

X1.4 Twis Transmit Ground end Ground end
ted negative for
CLK signals

X1.5 Transmit Ground end Ground end
positive for CLK
signals

X1.7 Twis Not defined Negative for time Not defined
ted information

X1.8 Not defined Positive for time Not defined
information




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 141
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-82 Technical specifications of the 120-ohm clock cable
Part Mod Description Con Connect Num Firepro
Nu el nect or X2 ber of
mbe or of Level
r X1 Core
s

1408 - Network Interface - - - -
0097 Connector,8-Bit
8PIN,Shielded,Crystal Model
Connector,24-26AWG,Leads
Single Solide Cable,For OEM
Matching 25050057

2505 - Twisted-Pair - - 2 IEC603
0057 Cable,100ohm,Category cores 32-1
5e,FTP,0.52mm,24AWG,8Core /pair
s,4Pairs,PANTONE 430U,Use
with Plug:14080097


3.5.7 Clock Bridging Cable

Overview
The clock bridging cable used by a device is the 120-ohm-to-75-ohm clock cable.

Structure
Figure 3-47 shows the structure of the 120-ohm-to-75-ohm clock cable.

Figure 3-47 Structure of a clock bridging cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Pin Assignments

Table 3-83 Pin assignments of clock bridging cables
120-ohm Cable 75-ohm
Cable

Connector Pin Core Wire Cable Relations Core Wire
Color Description hip No.

X1.1 Orange Receive Twisted W1
negative for the
120-ohm
external clock

X1.2 White Receive positive
for the 120-
ohm external
clock

X1.4 Blue Transmit Twisted W2
negative for the
120-ohm
external clock

X1.5 White Transmit
positive for the
120-ohm
external clock

X1.3 Green Not defined Twisted W3

X1.6 White Not defined

X1.7 White Not defined Twisted W4

X1.8 Brown Not defined




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 143
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-84 Technical specifications of a clock bridging cable
Part Mo Description Conn Con Cabl N Firepr
Nu del ector nect e u oof
mb X1 or Len m Level
er X2 gth be
r
of
C
or
es

040 T-1- Signal Cable,120ohm To MP8- - 30 - -
447 Sh- 75ohm Clock II m
26 RJ45 Cable,30m,MP8-II,
-30 (120CC4P0.4P430U(S)
+4*(SYV75-2/0.34(S))


3.5.8 Ethernet Cable

Overview
Ethernet cables are also known as network cables and can be classified into
straight-through cables and crossover cables according to the connection sequence
of the copper wire cores in the cables.
An Ethernet service interface can detect whether a straight-through or crossover
cable is plugged in, meaning it will work automatically with either cable type.
Therefore, you can choose either cable type as needed for your network setup.

NO TE

Ethernet cables need to be made onsite.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 144
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-48 Appearance of the Ethernet cable


Pin Assignments

Table 3-85 Pin assignments of the straight-through cable

Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Color Relationship

X1.1 X2.1 White/Orange Twisted

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White/Green Twisted

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted

X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted

X1.8 X2.8 Brown



Table 3-86 Pin assignments of the crossover cable

Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Color Relationship

X1.1 X2.3 White/Orange Twisted

X1.2 X2.6 Orange

X1.3 X2.1 White/Green Twisted

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 145
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Color Relationship

X1.6 X2.2 Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted

X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted

X1.8 X2.8 Brown



Technical Specifications

Table 3-87 Technical specifications of the straight-through cable

Descr Twisted-Pair Cable,100ohm,Category
iptio 5e,FTP,0.52mm,24AWG,8Cores,4Pairs,PANTONE 430U
n

Conn Network Interface Connector,8PIN,8-Bit,Shielded,Crystal Plug,AWG24–
ector 26,Solid-Core Cable with Inner Conductor
X1

Conn Network Interface Connector,8PIN,8-Bit,Shielded,Crystal Plug,AWG24–
ector 26,Solid-Core Cable with Inner Conductor
X2

Cabl 1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m
e
Leng
th

Inner 0.52 mm
Diam
eter

Num 2 cores/pair
ber
of
Cores



Table 3-88 Technical specifications of the crossover cable

Descr Twisted-Pair Cable,100ohm,Category
iptio 5e,FTP,0.52mm,24AWG,8Cores,4Pairs,PANTONE 430U
n

Conn Network Interface Connector,8PIN,8-Bit,Shielded,Crystal Plug,AWG24–
ector 26,Solid-Core Cable with Inner Conductor
X1

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 146
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Conn Network Interface Connector,8PIN,8-Bit,Shielded,Crystal Plug,AWG24–
ector 26,Solid-Core Cable with Inner Conductor
X2

Cabl 2 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m
e
Leng
th

Inner 0.52 mm
Diam
eter

Num 2 cores/pair
ber
of
Cores



3.5.9 Fiber Jumpers

Overview
A fiber jumper consists of one or more optical fibers of a certain length and the
optical connectors at both ends. A fiber jumper connects an optical module to a
fiber terminal box.

NO TE

The MPO-MPO optical fibers for routers use type B connectors (Key Up/Key Up).

Comply with the following rules when selecting fiber jumpers:

1. Determine the length of fiber jumpers based on the onsite cabling distance.
2. Determine the fiber type based on the optical module type.
– Use a multimode fiber jumper for a multimode optical module.
– Use a single-mode fiber jumper for a single-mode optical module.
3. Determine the optical connector type based on the port type.
Ensure that the optical connector at each end of a fiber jumper is of the same
type as the port to which it will be connected.


NO TICE

The optical transmission module of the multi-transverse mode needs to be
connected to the multimode fiber. The optical transmitting module of the single-
longitudinal mode or multi-longitudinal mode needs to be connected to the
single-mode fiber.

Optical Fibers

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 147
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Optical fibers are classified into single-mode fibers and multimode fibers.

● Single-mode fibers have a diameter of 5 to 10 μm and transmit laser in a
single mode with a specified wavelength. These fibers support a wide
frequency band and a large transmission capacity, so they are used for long-
distance transmission. Most single-mode fibers are yellow, as shown in Figure
3-50.
● Multimode fibers have a diameter of 50 or 62.5 μm and transmit laser in
multiple modes with a specified wavelength. They have a small capacity and
their performance is inferior to that of single-mode fibers, making them
suitable to short-distance transmission.
In the latest cabling infrastructure of ISO/IEC 11801, multimode fibers are
classified into four categories: OM1, OM2, OM3, and OM4.
– OM1: traditional 62.5/125 μm multimode fibers. OM1 fibers have a large
core diameter and numerical aperture, and provide high light gathering
ability and bending resistance.
– OM2: traditional 50/125 μm multimode fibers. OM2 fibers have a small
core diameter and numerical aperture. Compared with OM1 fibers, OM2
fibers provide higher bandwidth because they significantly reduce the
modal dispersion. When transmitting data at 1 Gbit/s with 850 nm
wavelength, OM1 and OM2 fibers support maximum link lengths of 220
m and 550 m, respectively. These two types of fibers can provide
sufficient bandwidth within a distance of 300 m. Generally, OM1 and
OM2 fibers are orange, as shown in Figure 3-51.
– OM3: next-generation multimode fibers, with longer transmission
distances than OM1 and OM2 fibers.
– OM4: laser optimized multimode fibers with 50 μm core diameter. OM4
is an improvement to OM3 and only increases the modal bandwidth.
OM4 fibers provide 4700 MHz*km of modal bandwidth, whereas OM3
fibers provide only 2000 MHz*km of modal bandwidth. Generally, OM3
and OM4 fibers are light green, as shown in Figure 3-52. You can identify
OM3 and OM4 fibers by their labels or printed marks.

MPO fibers are used for 40G and 100G optical modules. An MPO fiber consists of
multiple multimode fiber cores, and each multimode fiber core provides one laser
transmission channel. Some fiber suppliers produce 8-strand MPO fibers, while
some suppliers produce 12-strand or 24-strand MPO fibers.

● A 40G optical module uses four channels to transmit laser and four channels
to receive laser. That is, a total of eight channels are required for a 40G
optical module. 8-strand and 12-strand MPO fibers use the same definition of
fiber channels. Therefore, they are equivalent in functionality when
connecting to 40G optical modules.
● When 100G optical modules are used, choose MPO fibers according to the
optical module form factor. Choose 8-strand or 12-strand fibers for QSFP28
optical modules with MPO connectors.

Optical Connectors

Optical connectors are used to connect optical fibers of the same type. Table 3-89
lists common optical connectors.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 148
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-89 Common optical connectors
Connector Optical Connector
Type

Square SC/PC LC/PC MTRJ/PC MPO
connector connector connector connector connector


Round FC/PC ST/PC - -
connector connector connector




Figure 3-49 shows an LC/PC optical connector.

Figure 3-49 LC/PC optical connector


NO TICE

When connecting or removing an LC/PC optical connector, align the connector
with the optical port and do not rotate the fiber. Pay attention to the following
points:
● To connect a fiber, align the optical connector with the optical port and gently
insert the optical fiber into the port.
● To remove a fiber, press the clip on the connector, push the connector inward
slightly, and pull the fiber out.

Appearance
Figure 3-50 shows the appearance of an LC single-mode fiber.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 149
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-50 Appearance of an LC single-mode fiber


Figure 3-51 shows the appearance of an LC multimode fiber.

Figure 3-51 Appearance of an LC multimode fiber


Figure 3-52 shows the appearance of an MPO-MPO fiber.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 150
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-52 Appearance of an MPO-MPO fiber


Figure 3-53 shows the appearance of an MPO-4*DLC fiber.

Figure 3-53 Appearance of an MPO-4*DLC fiber


Pin Assignments of an MPO-4*DLC fiber


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 151
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-54 Structure of an MPO-4*DLC fiber


Table 3-90 Pin assignments of an MPO-4*DLC fiber
X1 Pin X2 Pin

1 1B

2 2B

3 3B

4 4B

9 4A

10 3A

11 2A

12 1A



NO TE

If the X1 end port is down but the X2 end port is up, check the X1 end port.
● Check whether this port supports the breakout function. If the X1 end port does not
support the breakout function, replace it with another port that supports the breakout
function.
● Check whether the X1 end port is in the breakout state. If the X1 end port is not in the
breakout state, configure the port to be in the breakout state.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 152
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.6 Fiber Breakout

3.6.1 Breakout Fibers

Positioning
Breakout fibers are used to flexibly allocate bandwidth resources to routers. They
cooperate with a breakout optical module to convert an MPO interface into
multiple LC interfaces to facilitate fiber layout.

Usage Scenario
The breakout function applies to a scenario where bandwidth resources are
unevenly allocated between two routers at different levels. In comparison with
breakout boxes, breakout fibers implement the following functions:
● Loosen fiber layout.
● Extend the cabling distance.

Fiber Structure
To insert a breakout optical module (multimode and short transmission distance)
into a port, use an MPO-LC fiber to directly connect the optical module.

Figure 3-55 MPO-LC fiber structure




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 153
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

NO TE

When using a breakout optical fiber, insert the X1 end into a 40GE QSFP+ optical module
and the X2 end into four 10GE interfaces. If the 40GE interface is Down but the four 10GE
interfaces are Up, check the 40GE interface status.
● Check whether the 40GE interface supports the breakout function. If the 40GE interface
does not support the breakout function, replace it with another interface that supports
the breakout function.
● Check whether the 40GE interface is in the breakout state. If the 40GE interface is not in
the breakout state, configure the 40GE interface to be in the breakout state.

Technical Specifications
Table 3-91 lists the breakout fibers.

Table 3-91 Breakout fibers supported
Type BOM Number Offi Mode
cial
Na
me

Optical Cable 14134759 MP Single mode
Parts,MPO/APC,MPO/ O1
APC,Single 2-
mode,10m,8 MP
cores,GJFH-8G.657A2,3 O1
.5mm,LSZH,43mm 2-
Short MPO,Bending SM-
insensitive 10

Optical Cable 14132538 MP Single mode
Assembly,MPO/ O1
APC,4*DLC/ 2-4
PC,Singlemode,GJFH DLC
8G.657A2(LSZH),15m, -
3.5mm,8 Cores,0m/ SM-
1m,2mm 15

Optical Cable 14132537 SS- Multimode
Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/ OP-
PC,Multi-mode,5m,8 MP
cores,0/1m,GJFH-8A1a. O1
2(OM3),3.5mm,2mm,L 2-4*
SZH,43mm Short DLC
MPO,Bending -
insensitive M-5


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 154
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Type BOM Number Offi Mode
cial
Na
me

Optical Cable 14132537-005 SS- Multimode
Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/ OP-
PC,Multi-mode,15m,8 MP
cores,0/1m,GJFH-8A1a. O1
2(OM3),3.5mm,2mm,L 2-4*
SZH,43mm Short DLC
MPO,Bending -
insensitive M-1
5B

Optical Cable 14132537-006 SS- Multimode
Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/ OP-
PC,MULTI- MP
MODE,30m,8 O1
CORES,0/1m,GJFH-8A1 2-4*
A.2(OM3),3.5MM,2mm DLC
,LSZH,43MM SHORT -
MPO,BENDING M-3
INSENSITIVE 0

Optical Cable 14132537-001 SS- Multimode
Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/ OP-
PC,Multi-mode,100m,8 MP
cores,0/1m,GJFH-8A1a. O1
2(OM3),3.5mm,2mm,L 2-4*
SZH,43mm Short DLC
MPO,Bending -
insensitive M-1
00

Optical Cable 14136626 MP Single mode
Parts,MPO/APC,8FC/ O1
UPC,SINGLE 2-4
MODE,15m,8 DFC
CORES,0/1m,GJFH-8G. -
657A2,3.5mm,2mm,LS SM-
ZH,43MM SHORT 15
MPO,BENDING
INSENSITIVE

Optical Cable 14136627 MP Single mode
Parts,MPO/APC,8SC/ O1
UPC,SINGLE 2-4
MODE,15m,8 DSC
CORES,0/1m,GJFH-8G. -
657A2,3.5mm,2mm,LS SM-
ZH,43MM SHORT 15
MPO,BENDING
INSENSITIVE

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 155
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description



Table 3-92 lists the optical modules and ports mapping breakout fibers.

Table 3-92 Optical modules and boards mapping breakout fibers
Breakout Fiber Optical Module Board

[14134759/MPO12- [02311NUA/ Check the Hardware
MPO12-SM-10] Optical OSM010N11] High Description. If the
Cable Parts,MPO/ Speed Transceiver,QSFP description of a port
APC,MPO/APC,Single +,1310,41.25Gbps,-8.2dB contains QSFP28 or
mode,10m,8 m,0.5dBm,-12.6dBm,MP QSFP+ and supports the
cores,GJFH-8G.657A2,3.5 O,SM,10km breakout function, the
mm,LSZH,43mm Short optical module and
MPO,Bending insensitive breakout fiber can be
used together with the
[14132538/ port.
MPO12-4DLC-SM-15]
Optical Cable
Assembly,MPO/
APC,4*DLC/
PC,Singlemode,GJFH
8G.657A2(LSZH),15m,3.5
mm,8 Cores,0m/
1m,2mm

[14136626/
MPO12-4DFC-SM-15]
Optical Cable
Parts,MPO/APC,8FC/
UPC,SINGLE
MODE,15m,8
CORES,0/1m,GJFH-8G.65
7A2,3.5mm,2mm,LSZH,4
3MM SHORT
MPO,BENDING
INSENSITIVE

[14136627/
MPO12-4DSC-SM-15]
Optical Cable
Parts,MPO/APC,8SC/
UPC,SINGLE
MODE,15m,8
CORES,0/1m,GJFH-8G.65
7A2,3.5mm,2mm,LSZH,4
3MM SHORT
MPO,BENDING
INSENSITIVE


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 156
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Breakout Fiber Optical Module Board

[14132537/SS-OP- [02310WUU/
MPO12-4*DLC-M-5] OMXD30010] Optical
Optical Cable Transceiver,QSFP
Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/ +,850nm,41.25Gbps,-7.6d
PC,Multi-mode,5m,8 Bm,-1dBm,-9.5dBm,MPO,
cores,0/1m,GJFH-8A1a.2( MMF,0.15km
OM3),3.5mm,2mm,LSZH,
43mm Short
MPO,Bending insensitive

[14132537-005/SS-OP-
MPO12-4*DLC-M-15B]
Optical Cable
Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/
PC,Multi-mode,15m,8
cores,0/1m,GJFH-8A1a.2(
OM3),3.5mm,2mm,LSZH,
43mm Short
MPO,Bending insensitive

[14132537-006/SS-OP-
MPO12-4*DLC-M-30]
Optical Cable
Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/
PC,MULTI-MODE,30m,8
CORES,0/1m,GJFH-8A1A.
2(OM3),3.5MM,2mm,LS
ZH,43MM SHORT
MPO,BENDING
INSENSITIVE

[14132537-001/SS-OP-
MPO12-4*DLC-M-100]
Optical Cable
Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/
PC,Multi-mode,100m,8
cores,0/1m,GJFH-8A1a.2(
OM3),3.5mm,2mm,LSZH,
43mm Short
MPO,Bending insensitive

[14132537/SS-OP- [02311NTY/
MPO12-4*DLC-M-5] OMND10N13] High
Optical Cable Speed
Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/ Transceiver,QSFP28,850n
PC,Multi-mode,5m,8 m,100G,-8.4dBm,2.4dBm,
cores,0/1m,GJFH-8A1a.2( -10.3dBm,MPO,MM,0.1k
OM3),3.5mm,2mm,LSZH, m,OM4
43mm Short
MPO,Bending insensitive


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 157
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Breakout Fiber Optical Module Board

[14132537-005/SS-OP-
MPO12-4*DLC-M-15B]
Optical Cable
Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/
PC,Multi-mode,15m,8
cores,0/1m,GJFH-8A1a.2(
OM3),3.5mm,2mm,LSZH,
43mm Short
MPO,Bending insensitive

[14132537-006/SS-OP-
MPO12-4*DLC-M-30]
Optical Cable
Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/
PC,MULTI-MODE,30m,8
CORES,0/1m,GJFH-8A1A.
2(OM3),3.5MM,2mm,LS
ZH,43MM SHORT
MPO,BENDING
INSENSITIVE



NO TE

Characters in the brackets indicate the BOM number and official name that are separated
using a slash ("/") in the [BOM number/Official name] format.
3.6.2 Breakout Boxes


3.6.2.1 Product Overview

Positioning

Breakout boxes are used to flexibly allocate bandwidth resources to routers. They
cooperate with a breakout optical module and optical jumper to convert an MPO
interface into multiple LC interfaces to facilitate fiber layout.

Product Features
● LC interfaces support automatic dust-proof covers, and MPO interfaces
support dust-proof plugs.
● In comparison with breakout fibers (MPO-LC fibers), breakout boxes feature
more flexible fiber layout.
● There is no restriction on the installation direction of breakout boxes, so that
the breakout boxes can be installed positively or negatively as needed.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 158
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Usage Scenario

The breakout function applies to a scenario where bandwidth resources are
unevenly allocated between two routers at different levels. In comparison with
breakout fibers, breakout boxes implement the following functions:
● Increase the density of fiber layout.
● Shorten the cabling distance.

Figure 3-56 Breakout box cabling


3.6.2.2 10-Port-MPO-12-40-Port-LC-Breakout Box(single-mode)

Appearance

Figure 3-57 10-Port-MPO-12-40-Port-LC-Breakout Box(single-mode)




Components

Figure 3-58 10-Port-MPO-12-40-Port-LC-Breakout Box(single-mode)


1. MPO adapter 2. LC adapter 3. Mounting ear


MPO adapters map LC adapters according to their numbers displayed on the
panel. Figure 3-59 shows the mapping between MPO and LC adapters.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 159
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-59 Mapping between MPO and LC adapters




MPO-12 Jumper
The TYPE-B MPO jumper is used. The following figure shows the MPO-12 jumper
structure and line orders of X1 and X2 ports.


Table 3-93 describes the mappings between the lanes of the X1 and X2 ports.

Table 3-93 Mappings between the lanes of the X1 and X2 ports

Start End Start End

X1-1 X2-12 X1-7 /

X1-2 X2-11 X1-8 /

X1-3 X2-10 X1-9 X2-4

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 160
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Start End Start End

X1-4 X2-9 X1-10 X2-3

X1-5 / X1-11 X2-2

X1-6 / X1-12 X2-1


Technical Specifications

Table 3-94 Technical specifications of the 10-Port-MPO-12-40-Port-LC-Breakout
Box (single-mode)
Item Description

BOM Number 02082890

Official Name ODBS10040

Dimensions (H x W x D) 43.6 mm x 442 mm x 164 mm

Mounting ear 19-inch supported

Weight 2.3 kg

Insertion loss ≤ 0.75 db

Return loss Single-mode: ≥ 30 db

Operating temperature –40°C to +65°C

Storage temperature –40°C to +70°C

Relative operating humidity ● Long term: 5% RH to 85% RH, non-
condensing
● Short term: 5% RH to 95% RH,
non-condensing

Relative storage humidity 0% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 161
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-95 Optical modules, jumpers, and ports supported by the 10-Port-
MPO-12-40-Port-LC-Breakout Box (single-mode)
Optical Module MPO-MPO Fiber Port

[02311NUA/ [14134759/MPO12- Supported boards:
OSM010N11] Function MPO12-SM-10] Optical Check the Hardware
Module,OSM010N11,Hig Cable Parts,MPO/ Description. If the
h Speed Transceiver,QSFP APC,MPO/APC,Single description of a port
+,1310,41.25Gbps,-8.2dB mode,10m,8 contains QSFP28 or QSFP
m,0.5dBm,-12.6dBm,MP cores,GJFH-8G.657A2,3.5 + and and supports the
O,SM,10km mm,LSZH,43mm Short breakout function, the
MPO,Bending insensitive optical module and
breakout fiber can be
used together with the
port.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 162
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


4 Hardware Installation and Parts
Replacement


4.1 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide of NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H

4.1 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide of
NetEngine 8000 F2A-8K36H

4.1.1 Hardware Installation and Usage Precautions

Following All Safety Precautions
● To ensure human and device security, comply with all the safety precautions
marked on the device and instructed in this document before any operation.
The CAUTION, WARNING, and NOTE items in this document do not cover all
the safety precautions that must be obeyed. They are supplements to the
safety precautions.
● When operating Huawei products and equipment, comply with safety
precautions and special safety instructions relevant to the corresponding
equipment provided by Huawei. The safety precautions in this document are
only some that Huawei can predict. Huawei is not liable for any consequence
that results from violation of universal regulations for safety operations and
safety codes on design, production, and equipment use.

Complying with Local Rules and Regulations

When operating a device, comply with local laws and regulations.

Installation Personnel Requirement

Installation and maintenance personnel must be trained to perform operations
correctly and safely.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 163
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Personnel Safety
● A high-voltage power supply provides power for device operations. Direct
human contact with the high voltage power supply or human contact through
damp objects can be fatal.
● Unspecified or unauthorized high voltage operations could result in fire or
electric shock, or both.
● Ground a device before powering it on; otherwise, the human body and the
device are exposed to danger.
● Before performing operations on the power supply facilities, power off these
facilities.
● Do not look into the optical port without eye protection when handling
optical fibers.
● To protect human respiratory organs and human eyes from dust, take
protective measures when drilling holes.
● When working at heights, prevent objects from falling down.

Device Security
● Keep an unpacked device upright and handle it with care when carrying it or
installing it into a cabinet.
● Use a ladder to lay out cables. Do not trample on a device.
● Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves when handling circuit boards.
Otherwise, the static electricity discharged from the human body may
damage the electrostatic sensitive components, such as large-scale integrated
circuits (LSIs) on the circuit board.
● Before operating the device, check the electrical connection of the device, and
ensure that the device is properly grounded.

Condensation Prevention
● Before installing the equipment, ensure that no condensation is on the
equipment. Otherwise, the equipment may fail to be powered on.
● If the indoor and outdoor temperature difference is 15°C or more, wait eight
hours after moving devices to the equipment and then install them.
● Generally, when the outdoor humidity is greater than 80% RH and the indoor
and outdoor temperature difference is greater than 5°C, condensation forms.
In highly humid weather, before installing a device or board, you are advised
to remove the package inside an equipment room and check whether
condensation forms as follows: Touch the surface of the device or board with
dry fingers or ESD gloves to check whether water marks exist. If they do,
condensation forms, and the device or board must be kept in the equipment
room for 8 hours before being powered on.

NO TE

If the temperature difference is undetermined, wait one night before installing the
equipment.If the temperature difference is undetermined, wait one night before
installing the equipment.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 164
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

CA UTION

In damp scenarios such as subways and tunnels, power on the equipment within
24 hours after unpacking to prevent condensation. During future maintenance,
ensure that the power-off time does not exceed 24 hours.

Power Module
● A power module will enter the protection state upon input overvoltage,
undervoltage, overtemperature, or output overcurrent. Note that when a
power module enters the overtemperature protection state, take measures to
lower the ambient temperature. The power module can automatically resume
power supply when the temperature falls within the normal range. After a
power module enters the protection state, the module will report a
corresponding protection state alarm to the MPU and cannot properly supply
power to the device. Note that a faulty fan module will also report fault
information to the MPU. If the power module cannot automatically resume
power supply after the triggering condition of the protection state is removed,
remove the power module from the chassis and reinstall it at least 30s later.
The power module then can work properly.

Cable
● To protect personal safety, do not install power cables when the power is on.
Before connecting power cables, make sure that the power switches of the
external power supply system and the device are all in OFF position.
● Before connecting signal cables, take ESD protection measures, for example,
wear ESD gloves or an ESD wrist strap.
● Before connecting Ethernet cables, use an Ethernet cable tester to test cable
connectivity.
● Both ends of an idle high-speed cable must be covered by an ESD cap.
● The bend radius of high-speed cables must be larger than the minimum bend
radius. Overbending high-speed cables may damage wires in the cables.
● Laser beams will cause eye damage. Do not look into bores of optical
modules or optical fibers without eye protection.
● Cover idle optical ports and optical modules with dust plugs and cover idle
optical fibers with dust caps.
● Bundle optical fibers with binding tape. Apply appropriate force to ensure that
the optical fibers in a bundle can be moved easily.
● Fiber connectors must be tidy and clean to ensure normal communication. If
a fiber connector is contaminated, clean it using a piece of fiber cleaning
fabric.

Optical Module
● Devices must use optical modules that are certified for Huawei devices.
Optical modules that are not certified for Huawei devices cannot ensure
transmission reliability and may affect service stability. Huawei is not liable
for any problems caused by the use of optical modules that are not certified
for Huawei devices.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 165
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● The transmit power of a long-distance optical module is often larger than its
overload power. Therefore, when using such optical modules, select optical
fibers of an appropriate length to ensure that the actual receive power is
smaller than the overload power. If the optical fibers connected to a long-
distance optical module are too short, use an optical attenuator to reduce the
receive power on the remote optical module. Otherwise, the remote optical
module may be burnt.
4.1.2 A610 Cabinet Installation

4.1.2.1 Introduction to the A610 Cabinet

Overview
This document details the A610-22 cabinet. If a third-party cabinet needs to be
evaluated, see 4.1.4.3 Checking the Cabinet.

Naming Conventions
The cabinet name A610-22 is divided into four fields, as shown in Figure 4-1.
Table 4-1 explains the meaning of each field.

Figure 4-1 Cabinet name


Table 4-1 Cabinet naming conventions
Field Description

1 Cabinet model

2 Cabinet width: 600 mm

3 Cabinet depth: 1000 mm

4 Cabinet height: 2200 mm


Appearance
NO TE

Figures in the document are for reference only, and the actual appearance of the cabinet
may vary depending on the exact model.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 166
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-2 shows the A610-22 cabinet appearance.

Figure 4-2 Cabinet appearance


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 167
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Functions

The cabinet complies with International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
60297-1. The distance between front and rear mounting rails is adjustable in 25
mm increments. Its assembled architecture facilitates capacity expansion.

The cabinet has the following features and functions:
● Static load bearing capability: 1 ton
● Sufficient space to place and connect components.
● Ability in protecting internal components from contamination.
● Ability in preventing damage to internal components.

Physical Structure

Figure 4-3 shows components of the A610 cabinet.

Figure 4-3 Cabinet components


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 168
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

1. Front door 2. Top cover 3. Rear door

4. Side panel 5. Mounting rail 6. Rack

Cabinet Material
The cabinet is made of class-A high-strength carbon cold rolled steel and
galvanized sheet, which complies with the Restriction of the use of certain
Hazardous Substances (RoHS). The fire endurance of interior materials complies
with Underwriter Laboratories (UL) standards.
The cabinet complies with International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
60297-1. The distance between front and rear mounting rails is adjustable in 25
mm increments. Its assembled architecture facilitates capacity expansion.
The cabinet has the following features and functions:
● Sufficient space to place and connect components.
● Ability in protecting internal components from contamination.
● Ability in preventing damage to internal components.

Cabling
The cabinet supports overhead or underfloor cabling.

ESD Jack
The cabinet has an ESD jack, as shown in Figure 4-4. When installing or
maintaining devices in the cabinet, wear an ESD wrist strap and insert the other
end of the ESD wrist strap in the ESD jack.

NO TE

A cabinet provides multiple grounding points. You can choose the nearest one.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 169
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-4 ESD jack on the cabinet


Heat Dissipation
The front and rear doors of the cabinet are of mesh construction. Air enters the
chassis from the front door and base and is exhausted through the rear door.
Figure 4-5 shows the airflow.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 170
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-5 Airflow in the cabinet




Technical Specifications

Table 4-2 lists technical specifications of the A610-22 cabinet.

Table 4-2 Technical specifications of the A610-22 cabinet

Item Details

Part number 02116078

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 2200 mm x 600 mm x 1050 mm
x D) (86.61 in. x 23.62 in. x 41.34 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 2320 mm x 720 mm x 1290 mm
D) (91.34 in. x 28.35 in. x 50.79 in.)

Weight (empty cabinet) 135 kg (297.62 lb)

Weight (assembly cabinet) 215 kg (473.99 lb)

Distance between the front and rear 650 mm
mounting rails

Available space 47U

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 171
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Item Details

Environment parameters ● Long-term temperature: 0°C to
40°C
● Short-term temperature: –5°C to
+55°C
● Long-term relative humidity: 5% RH
to 85% RH
● Short-term relative humidity: 0%
RH to 95% RH

Installation mode Installed on an ESD floor or a concrete
floor

Static load bearing capacity 1000 kg (2204.62 lb)



NO TE

● 1U equals 1.75 in. (approximately 44.45 mm). U is a unit of height defined in IEC
60297.
● The net weight is the weight of a cabinet with the front door and rear door.
● The weight of an assembly cabinet is the total weight of the empty cabinet, cabinet
accessories, and the package.
● The environment parameter values are measured at 0.4 m in front of the equipment
and 1.5 m above the ground.
● Short-term means the continuous working time within 96 hours and the accumulated
working time within 15 days per year.

4.1.2.2 Cabinet Accessories

4.1.2.2.1 (Optional) Cabinet Stand

Appearance
The cabinet stand is pictured in Figure 4-6.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 172
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-6 Cabinet stand




Functions
The stand elevates and supports the cabinet.

Technical Specifications
Table 4-3 lists technical specifications of the cabinet stand.

Table 4-3 Technical specifications of the cabinet stand
Stand Type Sta Applicable ESD Wi Applicable Chassis
nd Floor Height (mm) dth Depth (mm)
Nu (m
mb m)
er

Stand I 211 200–270 60 1000, 1100, and
507 0 1200
47

Stand II 211 270–410
507
22

Stand III 211 410–700
507
13




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 173
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

The ESD floor height is the distance between the upper surface of the ESD floor and the
surface of the concrete floor.

4.1.2.3 Cabinet Installation
The A610 series cabinets can be installed in fixed and or unfixed mode. Both
methods apply to installation on concrete and ESD floors.

4.1.2.3.1 Installing Cabinets on an ESD Floor

Perspective View After Installation
Figure 4-7 shows the perspective view of a single cabinet installed on an ESD
floor.

Figure 4-7 Single cabinet installed on an ESD floor


Figure 4-8 shows the perspective view of multiple cabinets installed on an ESD
floor.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 174
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-8 Multiple cabinets installed on an ESD floor


Installation Tools

Figure 4-9 lists the tools used for installing a cabinet.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 175
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-9 Installation tools




Installation Procedure

Figure 4-10 shows the procedure for installing a cabinet on an ESD floor.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 176
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-10 Flowchart for installing a cabinet on an ESD floor


Pre-installation Check

Precautions

Take the following precautions before the installation:

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 177
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Be careful not to damage components and cables in the cabinet during
transportation.
● If the cabinet surface is scratched, paint the scratched area with the same
painting as the other part to protect the cabinet.
● Conduct a comprehensive inspection on the cabinet before the installation. If
you find the cabinet distorted or its surfaces damaged, contact technical
support personnel immediately.
● Follow the installation instructions provided in this document and make
adjustments according to actual situations in your installation site.

Procedure

Step 1 Unpack and inspect the cabinet and accessories. The accessories include the
cabinet stand and expansion bolts used to secure the cabinet to the floor.
Step 2 Inspect the space inside and around the cabinet.
● Enough space must be reserved at the lower part of the cabinet for installing
expansion bolts.
● There must be enough space around the cabinet installation area for
operation and ventilation.

----End

Assembling the Cabinet Stand

Procedure

Step 1 Adjust the height of the cabinet stand.
1. Measure the distance between the concrete floor and surface of the ESD floor
with a measuring tape, as shown in Figure 4-11.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 178
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-11 Measuring the ESD floor height



2. Adjust the height of the cabinet stand according to the height of the ESD
floor. See callout 1 in Figure 4-12.
3. Tighten the height locking bolts on both sides. Do not tighten the bolts
completely; leave some space for leveling the cabinet stand. See callout 2 in
Figure 4-12.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 179
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-12 Tightening height locking bolts


Step 2 Assemble the cabinet stand, as shown in Figure 4-13.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 180
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-13 Assembling the cabinet stand


1. Adjust the depth of the cabinet stand according to the cabinet depth.
2. Fasten the six M8x20 bolts on the expandable levels using the torque socket.
See callout 1 in Figure 4-13.
3. Secure the expandable levels on the stand with eight M8x20 bolts. Use the
torque socket to fasten all the bolts with a torque of 13 N•m. See callout 2 in
Figure 4-13.
4. Fasten the six M8x20 bolts on the expandable levels using the torque socket
with a torque of 13 N•m. See callout 1 in Figure 4-13.
5. Check the stand with a level. See callout 3 in Figure 4-13.
6. If the stand leans, loosen the height locking bolts and adjust the height of the
stand until the stand is level.
7. Fasten all the locking bolts with a torque of 45 N•m. See callout 4 in Figure
4-13.

----End

Positioning the Cabinet Stand

?.1. Positioning a Single Cabinet Stand (for Installation of One Cabinet)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 181
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Procedure

Step 1 Place the cabinet stand in the planned position.
Step 2 Mark the mounting hole positions, as shown in Figure 4-14.

Figure 4-14 Positioning a single cabinet stand




----End

?.2. Positioning Cabinet Stands Side by Side (for Installation of Two or More
Cabinets)

Procedure

Step 1 Use plumb lines to position the first cabinet stand. Ensure that the outline of the
stand is in alignment with the cabinet outline drawn on the floor, as shown in
Figure 4-15.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 182
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-15 Positioning the first cabinet stand



Step 2 Install supporting brackets on both ends of each stand. See callout 1 in Figure
4-16.
Step 3 Connect the stands with combination plates. See callout 2 in Figure 4-16.
Step 4 Place the cabinet stand in the planned position.
Step 5 Mark the mounting hole positions. See callout 3 in Figure 4-16.

Figure 4-16 Positioning cabinet stands side by side


----End

Drilling Holes

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 183
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Precautions

Pay attention to the following points when drilling holes:
● If the floor is too hard and smooth to position the drill bit, use a nail punch
and hammer to create an indentation for the mounting holes. Then use the
drill bit to finish drilling holes.
● Keep the drill bit vertical with the ground and hold the drill stock with both
hands. Avoid shaking the drill stock; otherwise, the inclined drill bit will
damage the floor.
● Drill all holes to the same depth.

Procedure

Step 1 Install a Ф16 drill bit on the hammer drill.

Step 2 Use the hammer drill to drill holes in the marked positions on a concrete floor.
The hole depth is the total length of the expansion sleeve and expansion nut, in
the range from 52 mm to 60 mm.

Step 3 Remove dust inside and around the mounting holes with a vacuum cleaner, as
shown in Figure 4-17.

Figure 4-17 Drilling a hole




Step 4 Measure the hole depth and distance. If the hole depth or distance does not meet
requirements, drill holes again.

----End

Installing Expansion Bolts

Expansion Bolt Components

Figure 4-18 shows the components of an expansion bolt.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 184
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-18 Components of an expansion bolt


Precautions
● Before using expansion bolts, insert the bars on the expansion nuts into the
gaps on the expansion sleeve. Otherwise, expansion bolts cannot be fastened.
● The expansion sleeve of an expansion bolt must be flush with the mounting
hole. If the expansion sleeve is above the ground, the cabinet cannot be
installed properly.

Procedure

Step 1 Place an expansion bolt in a mounting hole.
Step 2 Tighten the spring washer, flat washer, and bolt.
Step 3 Hammer the expansion bolt with a claw hammer until the expansion sleeve is
flush with the hole, as shown in Figure 4-19.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 185
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-19 Installing an expansion bolt


Step 4 Tighten the expansion bolt clockwise with a wrench to make the expansion sleeve
expand.
Step 5 Turn the spring washer, flat washer, and bolt counterclockwise and remove them
from the expansion sleeve, as shown in Figure 4-20.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 186
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-20 Removing the spring washer, flat washer, and bolt


----End

Installing the Cabinet Stand

?.1. Installing a Single Cabinet Stand (for Installation of One Cabinet)

Procedure

Step 1 Align mounting holes on the cabinet stand with four expansion bolt mounting
holes on the floor, and install expansion bolts. See callout 1 in Figure 4-21.
Step 2 Use a level check whether the stand is level. See callout 2 in Figure 4-21.
Step 3 If the stand leans, place spacers below the stand. See callout 3 in Figure 4-21.
Step 4 Use a torque socket to fasten the four expansion bolts with a torque of 45 N m.
See callout 4 in Figure 4-21.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 187
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-21 Installing a single cabinet stand


----End

?.2. Installing Cabinet Stands Side by Side (for Installation of Two or More
Cabinets)

Procedure

Step 1 Check the stand with a level. See callout 1 in Figure 4-22.
Step 2 If the stand leans, place spacers below the stand. See callout 2 in Figure 4-22.
Step 3 Use a torque socket to fasten the four expansion bolts with a torque of 45 N m.
See callout 3 in Figure 4-22.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 188
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-22 Installing cabinet stands side by side


----End

Placing the Cabinet

Precautions
Pay attention to the following points when placing a cabinet:
● Expansion bolts have insulation washers. Install all insulation parts correctly
to ensure that the cabinet is insulated from the ground before cables are
connected.
● To reduce the stress between expansion bolts and the cabinet, fix the
expansion bolts on diagonal lines.

Procedure

Step 1 Place the cabinet on the cabinet stand and align mounting holes on the cabinet
with the mounting holes on the cabinet stand.

Step 2 Take insulation washers from the expansion bolt package, and put them on the
four M12x80 bolts, as shown in Figure 4-23.

Step 3 Put the bolts into the expansion sleeves underground and tighten the bolts, as
shown in Figure 4-23. Do not tighten the bolts completely; leave some space.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 189
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-23 Placing the cabinet


----End

Leveling the Cabinet

Procedure

Step 1 Check whether the cabinet is level using a level and plumb line, as shown in
Figure 4-24.
Step 2 If the cabinet leans, use an adjustable wrench to adjust the ground anchors until
the cabinet is level.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 190
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-24 Leveling the cabinet


NO TE

The ground anchors can be adjusted from 0 mm to 10 mm in height.

----End

(Optional) Combining Cabinets

Context

NO TE

This section applies to installation of two or more cabinets.

After settling and leveling two adjacent cabinets, combine the cabinets with
combination plates.

Combine one cabinet with one adjacent cabinet at a time.

Procedure

Step 1 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the screws from combination plates on the
front and rear doors. See callout 1 in Figure 4-25.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 191
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

Each combination plate is secured with one screw on the cabinet. To combine two cabinets,
remove the screws from the posts of one cabinet. These removed screws will be used to
secure the combination plate.
Step 2 Put a combination plate through a notch on the door, and then secure the
combination plate with screws removed in step 1. See callout 2 in Figure 4-25.
Step 3 Callout 3 in Figure 4-25 shows the combination plate after the cabinets are
combined.

Figure 4-25 Combining cabinets


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 192
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

● On a cabinet at the middle of a row, there are four points for cabinet combination at
both the front door and rear door.
● On a cabinet at the end of a row, there are two points for cabinet combination at both
the front door and rear door.
● The height difference and distance between cabinets cannot exceed 3 mm after
cabinets are combined.

----End

Securing the Cabinet

Procedure

Step 1 Verify that the spring washers, flat washers, and installation covering have been
correctly installed on the expansion bolts.

Step 2 Secure four expansion bolts on diagonal lines using a torque socket, with a torque
of 45 N•m. See Figure 4-26.

Figure 4-26 Securing the cabinet


----End


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 193
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Testing the Insulation Performance

Insulation Requirement

The impedance between the cabinet and ground must be larger than 5 Mohm.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the multimeter measurement mode to Mohm and measure the impedance
between the bolts and cabinet, as shown in Figure 4-27.

Figure 4-27 Insulation test


Step 2 View the impedance value on the multimeter.

If... Then...

The measured impedance is greater The impedance is within the allowed
than or equal to 5 Mohm range and the insulation test is
complete.

The measured impedance is smaller Go to 3.
than 5 Mohm



Step 3 Remove all the mounting accessories and check whether any insulation parts are
missing or damaged.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 194
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Step 4 Secure the cabinet and measure the impedance again.

----End

Installing Supporting Brackets on the Stand

Procedure

Step 1 Attach supporting brackets at the front and rear of the stand with M12x25 bolts,
as shown in Figure 4-28.

Figure 4-28 Installing supporting brackets


NO TE

Perform this step only in scenarios where a single cabinet is to be installed.

----End

4.1.2.3.2 Installing Cabinets on a Concrete Floor

Perspective View After Installation

Figure 4-29 shows the perspective view of a single cabinet installed on a concrete
floor.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 195
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-29 Single cabinet installed on a concrete floor


Figure 4-30 shows the perspective view of multiple cabinets installed on a
concrete floor.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 196
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-30 Multiple cabinets installed on a concrete floor


Installation Tools

Figure 4-31 lists the tools used for installing a cabinet.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 197
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-31 Installation tools




Installation Procedure

Figure 4-32 shows the procedure for installing a cabinet on a concrete floor.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 198
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-32 Flowchart for installing a cabinet on a concrete floor


Pre-installation Check

Precautions
Take the following precautions before the installation:
● Be careful not to damage components and cables in the cabinet during
transportation.
● If the cabinet surface is scratched, paint the scratched area with the same
painting as the other part to protect the cabinet.
● Conduct a comprehensive inspection on the cabinet before the installation. If
you find the cabinet distorted or its surfaces damaged, contact technical
support personnel immediately.
● Follow the installation instructions provided in this document and make
adjustments according to actual situations in your installation site.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 199
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Procedure

Step 1 Unpack and inspect the cabinet and accessories. The accessories include the
expansion bolts used to secure the cabinet to the floor.
Step 2 Inspect the space inside and around the cabinet.
● Enough space must be reserved at the lower part of the cabinet for installing
expansion bolts.
● There must be enough space around the cabinet installation area for
operation and ventilation. For how much space should be reserved, see
Marking Mounting Holes.

----End

Marking Mounting Holes

Cabinet Mounting Holes
Figure 4-33 shows the mounting holes for installing a single cabinet.

Figure 4-33 Mounting holes for installing a single cabinet


Figure 4-34 shows the mounting holes for side-by-side cabinet installation.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 200
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-34 Mounting holes for side-by-side cabinet installation


Table 4-4 provides the mounting hole distance for the cabinet.

Table 4-4 Mounting hole distance
Cabinet Width (mm) Width-wise Depth-x Depth-wise
Model Hole Spacing (mm) Hole
(mm) Spacing-y
(mm)

A610-22 600 413 1000 887


Procedure

Step 1 Use a measuring tape to determine the cabinet installation position according to
the engineering drawing, and mark the endpoints of the cabinet on the floor.
Step 2 Place the mounting hole diagram right at the position where the cabinet is to be
installed, and use a powder marker to outline the cabinet's dimensions.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 201
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-35 Outlining the cabinet's dimensions using a powder marker


Step 3 Move the cabinet to the installation area. Open the front and rear doors, remove
screws from the mounting holes, and mark the positions for mounting holes on
the bottom of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 4-36.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 202
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-36 Marking the positions for mounting holes


NO TE

After marking the mounting hole positions, use the measuring tape to measure the hole
distance and adjust the mounting hole positions according to the mounting hole diagram.

----End

Drilling Holes

Precautions
Pay attention to the following points when drilling holes:
● If the floor is too hard and smooth to position the drill bit, use a nail punch
and hammer to create an indentation for the mounting holes. Then use the
drill bit to finish drilling holes.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 203
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Keep the drill bit vertical with the ground and hold the drill stock with both
hands. Avoid shaking the drill stock; otherwise, the inclined drill bit will
damage the floor.
● Drill all holes to the same depth.

Procedure

Step 1 Install a Ф16 drill bit on the hammer drill.
Step 2 Use the hammer drill to drill holes in the marked positions on a concrete floor.
The hole depth is the total length of the expansion sleeve and expansion nut, in
the range from 55 mm to 60 mm.
Step 3 Remove dust inside and around the mounting holes with a vacuum cleaner, as
shown in Figure 4-37.

Figure 4-37 Drilling a hole


Step 4 Measure the hole depth and distance. If the hole depth or distance does not meet
requirements, drill holes again.

----End

Installing Expansion Bolts

Expansion Bolt Components
Figure 4-38 shows the components of an expansion bolt.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 204
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-38 Components of an expansion bolt


Precautions
● Before using expansion bolts, insert the bars on the expansion nuts into the
gaps on the expansion sleeve. Otherwise, expansion bolts cannot be fastened.
● The expansion sleeve of an expansion bolt must be flush with the mounting
hole. If the expansion sleeve is above the ground, the cabinet cannot be
installed properly.

Procedure

Step 1 Place an expansion bolt in a mounting hole.
Step 2 Tighten the spring washer, flat washer, and bolt.
Step 3 Hammer the expansion bolt with a claw hammer until the expansion sleeve is
flush with the hole, as shown in Figure 4-39.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 205
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-39 Installing an expansion bolt


Step 4 Tighten the expansion bolt clockwise with a wrench to make the expansion sleeve
expand.
Step 5 Turn the spring washer, flat washer, and bolt counterclockwise and remove them
from the expansion sleeve, as shown in Figure 4-40.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 206
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-40 Removing the spring washer, flat washer, and bolt


----End

Placing the Cabinet

Precautions
Pay attention to the following points when placing a cabinet:
● Expansion bolts have insulation washers. Install all insulation parts correctly
to ensure that the cabinet is insulated from the ground before cables are
connected.
● To reduce the stress between expansion bolts and the cabinet, fix the
expansion bolts on diagonal lines.

Procedure

Step 1 Move the cabinet into the outline drawn in the installation area. (The cabinet's
casters enable you to move the cabinet without additional tools.)
Step 2 Use a right angle to align the outer surface of the cabinet with the outline, as
shown in Figure 4-41.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 207
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-41 Placing the cabinet


Step 3 Take insulation washers from the expansion bolt package, and put them on the
four M12x115 bolts, as shown in Figure 4-42.
Step 4 Put the bolts into the expansion sleeves underground and tighten the bolts, as
shown in Figure 4-42. Do not tighten the bolts completely; leave some space.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 208
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-42 Tightening bolts


----End

Leveling the Cabinet

Procedure

Step 1 Check whether the cabinet is level using a level and plumb line, as shown in
Figure 4-43.
Step 2 If the cabinet leans, use an adjustable wrench to adjust the ground anchors until
the cabinet is level.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 209
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-43 Leveling the cabinet


NO TE

The ground anchors can be adjusted from 0 mm to 10 mm in height.
----End

(Optional) Combining Cabinets

Context
NO TE

This section applies to installation of two or more cabinets.
After settling and leveling two adjacent cabinets, combine the cabinets with
combination plates.
Combine one cabinet with one adjacent cabinet at a time.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 210
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Procedure

Step 1 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the screws from combination plates on the
front and rear doors. See callout 1 in Figure 4-44.

NO TE

Each combination plate is secured with one screw on the cabinet. To combine two cabinets,
remove the screws from the posts of one cabinet. These removed screws will be used to
secure the combination plate.
Step 2 Put a combination plate through a notch on the door, and then secure the
combination plate with screws removed in step 1. See callout 2 in Figure 4-44.
Step 3 Callout 3 in Figure 4-44 shows the combination plate after the cabinets are
combined.

Figure 4-44 Combining cabinets


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 211
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

● On a cabinet at the middle of a row, there are four points for cabinet combination at
both the front door and rear door.
● On a cabinet at the end of a row, there are two points for cabinet combination at both
the front door and rear door.
● The height difference and distance between cabinets cannot exceed 3 mm after
cabinets are combined.

----End

Securing the Cabinet

Procedure

Step 1 Verify that the spring washers, flat washers, and installation covering have been
correctly installed on the expansion bolts.
Step 2 Secure expansion bolts on diagonal lines using a torque socket, with a torque of
45 N•m. See Figure 4-45.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 212
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-45 Securing the cabinet


----End

Testing the Insulation Performance

Insulation Requirement
The impedance between the cabinet and ground must be larger than 5 Mohm.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the multimeter measurement mode to Mohm and measure the impedance
between the bolts and cabinet, as shown in Figure 4-46.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 213
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-46 Insulation test


Step 2 View the impedance value on the multimeter.
If... Then...

The measured impedance is greater The impedance is within the allowed
than or equal to 5 Mohm range and the insulation test is
complete.

The measured impedance is smaller Go to 3.
than 5 Mohm

Step 3 Remove all the mounting accessories and check whether any insulation parts are
missing or damaged.
Step 4 Secure the cabinet and measure the impedance again.

----End

4.1.2.4 Connecting PGND Cables


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 214
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Connecting the Chassis PGND Cable to the Cabinet
Connect the PGND cable of the device to the equipotential terminal at the rear of

the cabinet. The equipotential terminal is identified by a white flag on the
cabinet.

Connecting the Cabinet PGND Cable to a Ground Bar
The cabinet ground point is located at the top rear of the cabinet and identified by

the mark . Connect the ground point to a nearby ground bar in the
equipment room through a PGND cable. Secure the PGND point using M8 screws
with a torque of 13 N•m.

Figure 4-47 Connecting PGND cables


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 215
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.1.3 Device Installation Process

This section describes the general device installation process. Before installing
device, you need to determine the installation mode according to installation
environment. After unpacking and inspecting the device, you need to install the
chassis, fibers and cables in sequence, and then check the installation result. After
determining that the installation is correct, you can power on the device and then
check fiber connections.
Table 4-5 lists the general installation process.

Table 4-5 Device installation process
Installation Process Description

Preparing for the Before installing a device, plan and construct the
installation installation space and confirm the installation method
based on the requirements of device operation
environment. This is a prerequisite for smooth
installation, commissioning, and stable running of the
device. For details, see section Preparing for the
Installation in Hardware Installation and Maintenance.

Unpacking a device After the project starts, the project supervisor should
unpack and check the device together with the customer
representative. For details, see section Unpacking a
Device in Hardware Installation and Maintenance.

Installing a chassis The installation method of the chassis varies according
to the installation environment. For details, see section
Installing a Chassis in Hardware Installation and
Maintenance.

Planning cable To ensure that power cables are connected in order, you
routing are advised to plan power cable routing. For details, see
section Planning Cable Routing in Hardware Installation
and Maintenance.

Installing cables The methods of installing cables vary according to the
installation environment of the chassis. For details, see
section Installing Cables in Hardware Installation and
Maintenance.

Checking the To ensure normal and stable running of a device, you
installation need to check the installation of the device after all
hardware is installed. For details, see section Post-
Installation Check in Hardware Installation and
Maintenance.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 216
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Installation Process Description

Performing a power- Before powering on a device, you need to check the
on check voltage and fuse capacity of the external power supply.
After the power-on, you need to check whether the
device is running normally by observing the indicators.
For details, see section Power-on Check in Hardware
Installation and Maintenance.

Maintaining a device Faulty fuses and other electronic components can only
be replaced by professionals authorized by Huawei. For
details, see section Maintaining a Device in Hardware
Installation and Maintenance.



4.1.4 Preparation before the installtion


4.1.4.1 Reading Carefully the Safety Precautions

Before you start the installation procedure, read all safety precautions described in
this document and observe any warning labels affixed to the device. Doing so
ensures your safety and protects the device from damage.

Safety precautions provided in this document may not cover every eventuality, so
remain mindful of safety at all times.

Huawei is not liable for any consequence that results from violation of regulations
pertaining to safe operations or safety codes pertaining to design, production, and
equipment use.

Only trained and qualified personnel are allowed to install, operate, or maintain
the device. Familiarize yourself with all safety precautions before performing any
operation on the device.

General Safety


CA UTION

● Always take precautions against ESD whenever you handle a device. For
example, wear ESD gloves or an ESD wrist strap. To avoid electric shock or
burn, remove conductive objects like jewelry and watch.
● Connect the ground cable first after installing the device into a cabinet or rack.
Do not remove the ground cable unless all the other cables and modules have
been removed from the device.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 217
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

● During device transport and installation, prevent the device from colliding with
objects like doors, walls, or shelves.
● Move an unpacked device upright gently to avoid damages to the device. Do
not lay down the unpacked device and drag it.
● Do not touch unpainted surfaces of the device with wet or contaminated
gloves.
● Do not open the ESD bags of cards and modules until they are delivered to the
equipment room. When taking a card out of the ESD bag, do not use the
connector to support the card's weight because this operation will distort the
connector and make the pins on the backplane connector bend.

Environmental Safety


DANGER

Do not place or operate the device in an environment with flammable or explosive
gases or smoke.


NO TICE

● Keep the device away from sources of water to prevent damages to circuits.
● The installation site must be well ventilated to prevent the device from
overheating.

Electrical Safety


DANGER

● Direct contact with a high-voltage power source or indirect contact through
damp objects can be fatal. Misoperations on high-voltage facilities may result
in fire, electric shock, or other accidents.
● Never install or remove the device or power cables when the power is on. The
electric arc or spark generated between a power cable and conductor may
cause fire or eye damage.
● To protect personal and equipment safety, ground the device before powering it
on.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 218
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Laser Safety


CA UTION

● Laser beams will cause eye damage. Do not look into bores of optical modules
or optical fibers without eye protection.
● Cover fiber connectors with dust caps when they are not connected.

Mechanical Safety


CA UTION

● Wear protective gloves when you are moving the device.
● Use safe lifting practices when moving the equipment. Never attempt to lift
objects that are too heavy for one person to handle. Instead, seek help or use
appropriate tools.
● Before installing the chassis into or removing it from a cabinet, ensure there are
no objects that could fall from the cabinet and cause injury.
● If main control boards, service boards, and power modules have been installed
on the chassis, you are advised to remove them before moving the chassis to
prevent them from falling off and causing injury.
● Do not drill unapproved holes into a cabinet, as doing so may impair its
electromagnetic shielding and damage cables inside. In addition, drilling holes
produces metal shavings that may enter the cabinet and cause short circuits on
printed circuit boards (PCBs).

4.1.4.2 Checking the Installation Site

The Device must be used indoors. To ensure normal operations and long service
life of the device, the installation site must meet the following requirements
described in Table 4-6.

Table 4-6 Requirements for the installation site

Item Requirement

Cleanliness The device must be installed in a clean, dry, and well
ventilated standard equipment room with stable
temperature. The equipment room must be free from
leaking or dripping water, heavy dew, and humidity.

Dust proofing Dustproof measures must be taken in the site. Dust will
cause electrostatic discharges on the chassis and affect
connections of metal connectors and joints. This shortens
service life of the device and may cause failures of the
device.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 219
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Item Requirement

Temperature and The temperature and humidity in the installation site must
humidity be within specifications. For the operating temperature
and relative humidity ranges required by the device, see
device overview. If the relative humidity exceeds 70% RH,
using dehumidifiers or dehumidifying air conditioners is
recommended.

Corrosive gases The installation site must be free from acidic, alkaline, or
avoidance corrosive gases.

Heat dissipation Keep any objects or obstructions at least 75 mm away
space from the air intake and exhaust vents to facilitate heat
dissipation.

Maintenance The equipment must be stacked in the cabinet or installed
space at an interval of 2U or more to prevent the return air from
affecting heat dissipation.



4.1.4.3 Checking the Cabinet

The device can only be installed in a standard 19-inch cabinet. Huawei A610
cabinet is recommended. If you purchase a cabinet by yourself, ensure that the
cabinet meets the following requirements:

1. 19-inch cabinet with a depth of greater than or equal to 800 mm.

NO TE

If a shielding cover is used, 140 mm of clearance must be reserved between the device
and the cabinet's front door to facilitate cable routing.
2. The cabling space in front of the cabinet complies with the cabling space
requirements of service ports.

NO TE

For a cabinet with doors, reserve at least 110 mm clearance between the device's front
panel and the cabinet's front door, and at least 100 mm clearance between the
device's rear panel and the cabinet's rear door. Note that the 110 mm clearance
applies to scenarios where there is no optical attenuator and the optical fibers' LC
connectors are 42 mm long at most. If there are optical attenuators and the length of
the optical fibers' LC connectors is greater than 42 mm, the clearance is 110 mm plus
the cable routing space for the optical attenuators and optical fibers.
3. The device is designed with front-to-back or back-to-front airflow. The cabinet
must meet front-to-rear ventilation requirements.
4. The porosity of each cabinet door must be greater than 50%, meeting heat
dissipation requirements of devices.
5. The cabinet must be equipped with air filters.
6. The cabinet has installation accessories, such as guide rails, floating nuts, and
screws.
7. The cabinet has a ground terminal to connect to the device.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 220
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

8. The cabinet has a cable outlet on the top or at the bottom for overhead or
underfloor cabling.


CA UTION

1. The device supports front-to-rear and rear-to-front heat dissipation modes.
To ensure smooth and efficient heat dissipation, check the airflow direction
of the equipment room where the device is to be installed, and ensure that
cold air flows into the device from the air intake vent and leaves from the
air exhaust vent.
2. Note that the device adopts the air-cooling heat dissipation mode. To
implement efficient heat dissipation, make sure that the air intake and
exhaust vents are not blocked.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 221
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-48 A610 cabinet


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 222
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.1.4.4 Preparing Installation Tools and Accessories

Table1 lists the tools required for installing a device.

Table 4-7 Installation tools
Tool Description Picture

ESD gloves Used to
prevent
electrostatic
discharges.


Protective Used to
gloves protect hands
during
operation.


ESD wrist Used to
strap prevent
electrostatic
discharges.
Wear the
strap on your
wrist and
insert the
other end into
the ESD jack
on the
cabinet.

Utility knife Used to cut
cartons or
paper.

Scissors Used to cut
the
installation
template or
other
materials.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 223
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Tool Description Picture

Tweezers Used to
unplug
Ethernet
cables and
optical fibers.

Measuring Used to
tape measure
distances.


Marker Used to mark
component
installation
positions.

Flat-head Used to turn
screwdriver slotted-head
screws and
bolts.

Phillips Used to turn
screwdriver cross-head
screws and
bolts.

Combinatio Used to clamp
n pliers or bend metal
sheets, cut
metal wires,
strip off
coating of
cables, and
unplug nails.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 224
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Tool Description Picture

Diagonal Used to cut
pliers insulation
tubes and
cable ties.


Wire Used to strip
stripper off the
insulation
coating and
shields of
communicatio
n cables with
small cross-
sectional
areas.

RJ45 Used to crimp
crimping Ethernet
tool cables.


COAX Used to crimp
crimping the metal
tool shield at the
end of a
coaxial cable.

Ethernet Used to test
cable tester Ethernet cable
connectivity.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 225
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Tool Description Picture

Multimeter Used to test
cabinet
insulation,
cable
connectivity,
and device
electrical
performance
indicators,
including
voltage,
current, and
resistance.

Adjustable Used to
wrench tighten or
loosen hex or
square bolts
and nuts. The
span can be
adjusted to
suit bolts or
nuts in
different sizes.


Table2 lists the installation accessories required for installing a device.

Table 4-8 Installation accessories
Tool Description Picture

Insulation Used to
tape insulate
power wires
or other
conductors.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 226
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Tool Description Picture

Corrugated Used to
pipe protect optical
fibers.




Table3 lists the installation accessories delivered with the device.

Table 4-9 Installation accessories
Accessory Quantity Description Part Number

Product 1 Used to guide equipment 31500GBC
Documen installation.
tation

Expandab 1 pair Expandable in the range of 450 21244924
le guide mm to 730 mm.
rail

Tweezers 1 Used to remove optical fibers. 21122173

IEC 1 pair Mounting bracket of the chassis. 21242042
mounting
bracket

Cross 2 Ground screws of the chassis. 26010534
recessed
pan head
screw

Cross 8 Screws for installing mounting 26010745
recessed brackets.
countersu
nk head
screw

Serial 1 Used to connect the console 04040838
cable port of the device to a serial
port of a maintenance terminal
for local commissioning or
maintenance of the device.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 227
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Accessory Quantity Description Part Number

Panel 6 Used to fix expandable guide 26020141
screw rails and the device.
(M6x12)

Floating 6 Installed on mounting rails of a 26020075
nut (M6) cabinet or rack and used with
M6 screws to secure the
expandable guide rails and the
device in the cabinet or rack.

Fiber 2 m Used to bundle optical fibers. 21101258
binding
tape

Cable tie 100 Used to bundle cables. 21100144
(300 x 3.6
mm)

Label 12 Used to bundle cables and 21200708
cable tie attach the power cable label
(29041061) to the cables.

Signal 9 Used to identify locations of 29041060
cable signal cables.
label

Power 1 Used to identify locations of 29041061
cable power cables.
label


4.1.4.5 Inspecting and Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors and Adapters

4.1.4.5.1 Overview
This topic introduces the purpose and procedure of cleaning optical fiber
connectors, as well as polluters to optical fiber connectors.
Cleaning fiber connectors is to remove dust or other dirt to avoid performance
degradation of optical transmission systems.
Figure 4-49 shows an optical fiber connector.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 228
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-49 Optical fiber connector


Optical fiber connectors should be free of:
● Dust
● Grease (usually brought by hands)
● Condensate residue
● Powder (evaporated residue of water or solvent)
Dust is the most common dirt in optical fiber connectors. The dust particles that
can be seen only by a microscope can affect the quality of optical signals,
deteriorate the system performance, and cause instability in network operation.
A 1-micrometer dust particle on the single-mode fiber connector can block 1%
light and cause 0.05 dB attenuation. A 9-micrometer dust particle that cannot be
seen by human eyes can block an entire fiber core. Therefore, small dirt even that
cannot be seen by human eyes should be removed.

NO TE

Before you connect any optical component, make sure that you have checked and cleaned
the component.

Procedure
Table 4-10 describes the procedure of inspecting and cleaning the optical fiber
connectors and adapters.

Table 4-10 Procedure of inspecting and cleaning the optical fiber connectors and
adapters

Step Details

Clean optical fiber connectors using See "Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors
the cassette cleaner Using the Cassette Cleaner".

Clean optical fiber connectors using See "Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors
lens tissue Using Lens Tissue".

Clean optical fiber adapters using See "Cleaning Optical Fiber Adapters
dustfree absorbent swabs Using Dustfree Absorbent Swabs".



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 229
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.1.4.5.2 Protection of Optical Fiber Connectors
This topic describes requirements for fiber connector protection.
The requirements are as follows:
● All boards with optical ports must be packed properly, to avoid mechanical
and electrostatic damages and to reduce vibrations.
● The protective caps must be put in an ESD bag.
● Protective caps must be installed on all optical fiber connectors when not in
use. The optical fiber connectors must be stored in proper packages to keep
them clean.
● Figure 4-50 shows the recommended protective caps, whereas Figure 4-51
shows the protective caps not recommended.

Figure 4-50 Protective caps recommended


Figure 4-51 Protective caps not recommended


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 230
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

The protective caps not recommended are made of soft rubber, which are apt to absorb
dust and sundries, and difficult to clean.

4.1.4.5.3 Tools, Equipment, and Materials
Optical connectors should be cleaned using recommended tools, equipment and
materials.
The following provides the recommended tools, equipment and materials:
● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)
● cassette cleaner shown in Figure 4-52
● Cleaning solvent (Isoamylol is preferred, propyl alcohol is the next, and
alcohol or formalin is forbidden.)
● Non-woven lens tissue, fiber cleaning tissue, and dustfree cloth (Non-woven
lens tissue is recommended.)
● Special compressed air
● Special cleaning roll
● Dustfree absorbent swab (made of medical cotton or long fiber cotton)
shown in Figure 4-53 and Figure 4-54

Figure 4-52 Cassette cleaner


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 231
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-53 Dustfree absorbent swabs for cleaning the SC and FC connectors


Figure 4-54 Dustfree absorbent swabs for cleaning the LC connectors


4.1.4.5.4 Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors
This topic describes how to inspect the end face of optical fibers using a fiber
microscope.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
The following provides the required tools, equipment and materials for inspecting
optical fiber connectors:
● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)

Precautions


CA UTION

Laser energy is invisible and may cause eye injuries. Never look directly into fiber
connectors or ports.
Use a fiber microscope equipped with a safety device or a desktop video fiber
microscope when inspecting the optical fiber connectors.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 232
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

Electrostatic discharge is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Wear an ESD
wrist strap and ensure that the strap is grounded properly before touching the
equipment and boards, to protect the static-sensitive components against
electrostatic discharge of the human body. Otherwise, the equipment may be
damaged or the service may be interrupted.

Procedure
1. Shut down the laser and disconnect the fiber end before inspecting the fiber
connector.
2. Test the optical power using a power meter to ensure that the laser is shut
down.
3. Use a fiber microscope to check whether the fiber connector is contaminated
or damaged. See the examples below.
– Clean fiber and face
Figure 4-55 shows an image of a clean fiber end face under the fiber
microscope.

Figure 4-55 Clean fiber and face


– Damaged fiber end face
Figure 4-56 shows images of the damaged fiber end face. The image on
the left shows a severely damaged fiber. Severely damaged fibers can
cause damage to the equipment and should not be used. The image on
the right shows a defective fiber. If the output power is within a certain
range, the defective fiber might not cause any damage to the equipment.
If the output power is unstable or out of the range, however, the
defective fiber can cause damage to the equipment.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 233
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-56 Damaged or defective fiber end face


NO TE

Figure 4-56 shows only the 800-micrometer fiber cores.
For details on acceptable and unacceptable fibers, see Figure 4-57, Figure
4-58 and Figure 4-59.

Figure 4-57 Clean fiber end face


Figure 4-58 Acceptable fibers with imperfections


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 234
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-59 Unacceptable fibers with imperfections


4. If any dirt is detected, clean the optical fiber connector. For details, see
"Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using the Cassette Cleaner" and "Cleaning
Optical Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue".
5. If any damage is detected, replace the fiber.

4.1.4.5.5 Inspecting the Optical Fiber Link
This section describes the insertion loss and reflection requirements of optical links
and the method of checking the quality of optical links for the application of 50G
optical modules with the PAM4 coding technology.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
Tools and instruments for checking optical fiber links are as follows:
● OTDR meter
● Fiber microscope

Precautions

CA UTION

Because the transmit optical power of the OTDR meter is much higher than the
damaged optical power threshold at the receive end, the optical fiber must be
removed from the optical module when the OTDR meter is used to test the optical
path quality.

Currently, the Ethernet port rate is increasing. Since the 50G optical module link
uses the PAM4 encoding technology, there are higher requirements on the optical
fiber and cable quality and the link is more sensitive to multipath reflection
interference of signals. If the fiber link connector, fiber section, or fiber splicing
surface is dirty, optical signals are reflected back and forth on the fiber link,
causing interference due to co-channel noise on the receive side. As a result, the
optical link is unstable or intermittently disconnected.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 235
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

According to the national standard (GBT50312-2016), the loss of the optical fiber
link connector must meet the requirements described in Table 4-11.

Table 4-11 Maximum attenuation of the optical fiber connector

Type Maximum attenuation of an optical fiber
connector (dB)

Fiber splicing connector 0.3

Optical mechanical connector 0.3

Optical connector 0.75



NO TE

Fiber cores are connected through connectors, such as the ODF, optical attenuator, and
flange, in splicing and mechanical modes.

Table 4-12 describes requirements for the reflection of the optical fiber connector
when Ethernet ports (such as 50G) use PAM4 encoding to double the rate. More
connectors bring lower requirements for the reflection.

Table 4-12 Maximum reflection of connectors

Number of Maximum Reflection of Each Connector (dB)
Optical Fiber
Connectors 50GBASE-FR 50GBASE-LR 50GBASE-ER

1 -25 -22 -19

2 -31 -29 -27

4 -35 -33 -32

6 -38 -35 -35

8 -40 -37 -37

10 -41 -39 -39



Procedure
1. After the optical fiber at the peer end is disconnected, use the OTDR meter to
test the local end. Check whether the loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal. (The loss of a fiber splicing connector should be less than
0.3 dB, the loss of a connector should be less than 0.75 dB, and the reflection
of a connector should be less than -30 dB.) If the test result is not within the
required range, process the abnormal port.
2. Locate the equipment room where the port resides based on the distance
between abnormal points in the OTDR test result. Preliminarily determine the
port location, disconnect the port, and perform an OTDR test on the port that

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 236
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

reports alarms. Check whether the distance is consistent with that in the
previous test. If not, continue to test other ports.
3. After the abnormal port is found, test the port using a fiber microscope. If the
port is dirty, clean it. For details, see "Inspecting and Cleaning Optical Fiber
Connectors and Adapters".
4. After the port is cleaned, restore the port, and ensure that the connector is
tightened. Perform an OTDR test on the port to check whether loss and
reflection of each link and node are normal.
5. If the fault persists, replace the flange and perform an OTDR test on the port
that reports alarms to check whether loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal.
6. If the fault persists, replace the optical fiber and perform an OTDR test on the
port that reports alarms to check whether loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal.
7. If multiple abnormal points exist on the link, repeat steps 2 to 6.

4.1.4.5.6 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using the Cassette Cleaner

This topic describes how to clean the fiber connectors using a cassette cleaner.

Prerequisites

Before cleaning, inspect the fiber end face with a fiber microscope or a magnifier
to confirm the degree of fiber contamination. Clean the fiber only when it is
severely contaminated. This is because the cleaning operation itself may introduce
dust, dirt, or cause damage to the fiber.

The following procedure provides the steps to clean the fiber connectors using
cartridge type cleaners.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

The following lists the required tools, equipment and materials for cleaning optical
fiber connectors:

● cassette cleaner
● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)

Precautions


CA UTION

Laser energy is invisible and may cause eye injuries. Never look directly into fiber
connectors or ports.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 237
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

Electrostatic discharge is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Wear an ESD
wrist strap and ensure that the strap is grounded properly before touching the
equipment and boards, to protect the static-sensitive components against
electrostatic discharge of the human body. Otherwise, the equipment may be
damaged or the service may be interrupted.

Procedure
1. Shut down the laser and disconnect the fiber end before inspecting the fiber
connector.
2. Test the optical power using a power meter to ensure that the laser is shut
down.
3. Press down and hold the lever of the cassette cleaner. The shutter slides back
and exposes a new cleaning area. See Figure 4-60.

Figure 4-60 Using the cassette cleaner


4. Place the fiber end face gently against the cleaning area.
5. Drag the fiber end face gently on one cleaning area in the arrow direction
each time. See Figure 4-61. Do it again on the other cleaning area in the
same direction as the first time once. See Figure 4-62.


NO TICE

Do not drag the fiber end face on the same cleaning area more than once.
Otherwise, the connector can be contaminated or damaged.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 238
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-61 Dragging the fiber end face gently on one cleaning area


Figure 4-62 Dragging the fiber end face gently on the other cleaning area


6. Release the lever of the cassette cleaner to close the cleaning area.
7. Use a fiber microscope to inspect the fiber to check whether there is any dirt.
For details see the examples shown in "Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors".
If the fiber end face is still dirty, repeat 1 to 6.
8. Connect the fiber to the optical port immediately. If it is not used for the time
being, put a protective cap on it.
9. Turn on the laser after connecting the fiber to the board.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 239
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.1.4.5.7 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue

This topic describes how to clean the fiber connectors using lens tissue.

Prerequisites

Before cleaning, inspect the fiber end face with a fiber microscope or a magnifier
to confirm the degree of fiber contamination. Clean the fiber only when it is
severely contaminated. This is because the cleaning operation itself may introduce
dust, dirt, or cause damage to the fiber.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

The following provides the required tools, equipment and materials:
● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)
● Cleaning solvent (Isoamylol is preferred, propyl alcohol is the next, and
alcohol or formalin is forbidden.)
● Non-woven lens tissue, fiber cleaning tissue, and dustfree cloth (Non-woven
lens tissue is recommended.)
● Special compressed air or cleaning roll

Precautions


CA UTION

Laser energy is invisible and may cause eye injuries. Never look directly into fiber
connectors or ports.


NO TICE

Electrostatic discharge is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Wear an ESD
wrist strap and ensure that the strap is grounded properly before touching the
equipment and boards, to protect the static-sensitive components against
electrostatic discharge of the human body. Otherwise, the equipment may be
damaged or the service may be interrupted.

Procedure
1. Shut down the laser and disconnect the fiber end before inspecting the fiber
connector.
2. Test the optical power using a power meter to ensure that the laser is shut
down.
3. Put a little cleaning solvent on the lens tissue.
4. Clean the fiber end face on the lens tissue. See Figure 4-63 and Figure 4-64.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 240
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

Drag the fiber end face on the same area in the lens tissue only once.
Otherwise, the connector can be contaminated or damaged.

Figure 4-63 Cleaning the fiber end face using the lens tissue on the desk


Figure 4-64 Cleaning the fiber end face using the lens tissue on the hand


5. Repeat 4 several times on the areas of the lens tissue that have not been
used.
6. Use the compressed air to blow off dust on the fiber end face.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 241
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

● When using the compressed air, keep the nozzle as close as possible to the fiber
end face without touching it.
● Before using the compressed air, first spray it into the air to expel deposits in the
compressed air.
● If the compressed air is not available, use a cleaning roll instead.
7. Use a fiber microscope to inspect the fiber to check whether there is any dirt.
For details, see the examples shown in "Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors".
If the fiber end face is still dirty, repeat 1 to 6.
8. Do not touch the fiber connector after cleaning it. Connect it to the optical
port immediately. If it is not used for the time being, put a protective cap on
it.

NO TE

Do not use the same cleaning area to clean the fiber connector for more than one
time.
9. Turn on the laser after connecting the fiber to the board.

4.1.4.5.8 Cleaning Optical Fiber Adapters Using Dustfree Absorbent Swabs

This topic describes how to clean fiber adapters using dustfree absorbent swabs.

Prerequisites

There are several types of dustfree absorbent swabs available. Select appropriate
dustfree absorbent swabs based on site conditions. You can obtain the following
tools and materials from a fiber cable and connector manufacturer.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

The following lists the required tools, equipment and materials:
● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)
● Cleaning solvent (Isoamylol is preferred, propyl alcohol is the next, and
alcohol or formalin is forbidden.)
● Special compressed air
● Dustfree absorbent swab (made of medical cotton or long fiber cotton)

Precautions


CA UTION

Laser energy is invisible and may cause eye injuries. Never look directly into fiber
connectors or ports.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 242
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

Electrostatic discharge is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Wear an ESD
wrist strap and ensure that the strap is grounded properly before touching the
equipment and boards, to protect the static-sensitive components against
electrostatic discharge of the human body. Otherwise, the equipment may be
damaged or the service may be interrupted.

Procedure
1. Shut down the laser and disconnect the fiber end before inspecting the fiber
connector.
2. Test the optical power using a power meter to ensure that the laser is shut
down.
3. Select the dustfree absorbent swab with a proper diameter based on the type
of an adapter.

NO TE

For SC and FC fiber adapters, use the dustfree absorbent swab with a diameter of 2.5
mm (0.1 in.); for the LC fiber adapter, use the dustfree absorbent swab with a
diameter of 1.25 mm (0.05 in.). See Figure 4-65 and Figure 4-66.

Figure 4-65 Dustfree absorbent swabs for cleaning the SC and FC connectors


Figure 4-66 Dustfree absorbent swabs for cleaning the LC connectors


4. Put a little cleaning solvent on the dustfree absorbent swab.
5. Place the dustfree absorbent swab gently on the adapter so that the cleaning
solvent is against the fiber end face. Draw out the dustfree absorbent swab
from the fiber adapter and then rotate the dustfree absorbent swab clockwise
once. Ensure that the tip of the dustfree absorbent swab directly contacts the
fiber end face.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 243
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

6. Use the compressed air to blow off dust on the fiber end face.

NO TE

● When using the compressed air, keep the nozzle as close as possible to the fiber
end face without touching it.
● Before using the compressed air, first spray it into the air to expel deposits in the
compressed air.
7. Step 7 Use a fiber microscope to inspect the fiber to check whether there is
any dirt. For details, see "Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors". If the fiber end
face is still dirty, repeat 1 to 6.
8. Connect the fiber to the optical port immediately. If it is not used for the time
being, put a protective cap on it.
9. Turn on the laser after connecting the fiber to the board.

4.1.4.6 Inspection of Power Distribution Environment

4.1.4.6.1 Introduction to the Power Distribution System
Devices support both AC and DC power supplies.
● AC power supply mode: Under normal conditions, uninterruptible power
supply (UPS) obtains three-phase 380 V AC power input from a mains power
outlet and transmits 380 V AC power to an AC power distribution frame. A
chassis receives power from the AC power distribution frame through the
power distribution unit (PDU) installed in the cabinet.

Figure 4-67 AC power supply mode


● High-voltage (240 V) DC power supply mode: Under normal conditions, a
rectifier system obtains three-phase 380 V AC power input from a mains
power outlet and transmits 240 V DC power to a DC power distribution frame.
A chassis receives power from the DC power distribution frame through the
PDU installed in the cabinet/rack.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 244
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-68 High-voltage (240 V) DC power supply mode


● DC power supply mode: Under normal conditions, a rectifier system receives
three-phase 380 V AC power input from a mains power outlet and transmits
-48 V DC power to a DC power distribution frame. The device obtains power
from the DC power distribution frame.

Figure 4-69 DC power supply mode


4.1.4.6.2 DC Power Distribution


DANGER

Do not connect power cables while the power is on. Otherwise, personal injuries
may occur.

Figure 4-70 Schematic diagram for power distribution


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 245
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Power Distribution Information
For details about power cable specifications, see power cable-related sections in
Hardware Description > Cables.

Table 4-13 Circuit breaker and current parameters of a PDF
Item Specification Remarks

Each circuit ≥ 50 A -
breaker NOTICE
1. Each DC power module must
be connected to an independent
upstream circuit breaker.
2. The current of the circuit
breaker must not exceed the
maximum derated current of
the power supply or device.
3. The upstream circuit breaker
must have a capacity greater
than or equal to the maximum
current capacity of the
corresponding power cable.



Installing Power Cables
1. Connect each power cable to the power connector.
2. Attach temporary labels to both ends of each power cable.
3. Route power cables along the cable ladder and cable tray to the chassis.
4. Connect each DC power connector to its corresponding port (preferably input
port A), and then connect the other end of the power cable to the PDF.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 246
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-71 Installing a power cable


5. Attach permanent labels 20 mm (0.79 in.) from both ends of the power cable.
6. After connecting the power cable, use cable ties to bundle the cable every 150
mm upwards from the bottom and fasten the cable to the cable tray.

NO TE

To maintain an appropriate length for the power cable, take the following installation
steps:
1. Prepare a power cable with a length longer than the distance between the power
module and PDF.
2. Install the power cable terminal on the device side, and then install the power
connector on the device side. To facilitate power cable routing, you are advised to
use only the channel-A input port located on the right side of the power supply, as
shown in Figure 4-71.
3. Securely connect the power cable to the positive and negative electrodes.
Otherwise, the power test result will be inaccurate.
4. Route the power cable, secure it to the cable tray, and trim any excess length from
the cable. Install a terminal on the other end of the power cable and connect the
terminal to the PDF.

4.1.4.6.3 AC Power Distribution


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 247
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

DANGER

Do not connect power cables while the power is on. Otherwise, personal injuries
may occur.

Figure 4-72 Schematic diagram for power distribution


Power Distribution Information
For details about power cable specifications, see power cable-related sections in
Hardware Description > Cables.

Table 4-14 Circuit breaker and current parameters of a PDF
Item Specification Remarks

Each circuit breaker ≥ 16 A To adhere to the hierarchical
NOTICE power distribution protection
1. Each AC power module principle, it is advisable to
must be connected to an install a 16 A circuit breaker
independent upstream on the user side.
circuit breaker.
2. The current of the circuit
breaker must not exceed the
maximum derated currents
of the power supply and
device.
3. The upstream circuit
breaker must have a
capacity greater than or
equal to the maximum
current capacity of the
corresponding power cable.



Installing Power Cables
1. Route power cables along the cable ladder and cable tray to the chassis.
2. Connect an AC power cable to an AC input port and secure the cable using a
loose-proof pinch, as shown in Figure 4-73. Then, connect the other end of
the cable to the PDF in the equipment room.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 248
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-73 Installing an AC power cable


3. Use cable ties to bundle the AC cable every 150 mm upwards from the
bottom and then secure the cable to the rear column of the cabinet.
4. Attach permanent labels 20 mm (0.79 in.) from both ends of the power cable.

Connecting an AC Power Cable to the AC Power Distribution Box
1. Remove a specific length of the cable sheath and cut the PE wire (yellow-
and-green) at the point where the cable sheath is removed (you can wrap the
exposed PE wire with a PVC insulation tape to prevent electricity leakage or
short circuit). Then, remove the sheath of the L wire (brown) and that of the
N wire (blue) and crimp the OT or cord end terminals.

NO TE

The colors of AC power cables vary according to countries and regions. Cables
purchased from local markets must comply with local rules and regulations.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 249
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


2. Connect the L and N wires to the L and N input terminals on the power
distribution box, respectively.
When 110 V power supply (double live wires) is provided, connect the L and
N cables on the device to the two L cables in the user equipment room, and
install the PE ground cable. Configure a circuit breaker for each of the L and
N cables in the user equipment room.

4.1.4.7 Unpacking a Device

Tools
● ESD gloves
● Diagonal pliers
● Paper knife


CA UTION

● Integrated circuits (ICs) are sensitive to electrostatic discharge from the
human body. When handling boards or metallic parts of the equipment,
wear ESD gloves and hold only the edges of the boards during operation.
● If the equipment is transported from a cold and dry place to a warm and
damp place, wait at least 30 minutes before unpacking it. Otherwise, the
moisture condenses on the board surface and damages the components.

Procedure
1. Transport the packing box to the equipment room.
2. Check the packing box, and stop unpacking it in any of the following cases:
– The outer package is severely damaged.
– There is water leakage on the outer package.
Find the causes and provide feedback to the local representative office of
Huawei.
3. Observe the labels on the carton to check the equipment configuration and
take a record.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 250
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4. Cut the strap with the diagonal plier and then split the adhesive tape properly
along the seam between the cover and the body of the box with the paper
knife. Do not scratch the articles inside the box.

Figure 4-74 Unpacking the carton of the NetEngine 8000 F2ANetEngine 8000
F2C


1. Pressure-sensitive 2. Carton label 3. Packing box
adhesive tape

4. Foam protector 5. Chassis -

5. Open the carton and take out the chassis box from the carton.
6. Open the chassis box and take out the chassis. Then, check whether the
chassis is damaged.
4.1.5 Installing a chassis in a Cabinet

Precautions
Ensure that the cabinet has been properly installed before installing devices in the
cabinet. The cabinet can be installed on an ESD floor or concrete floor.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 251
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

● When installing devices, ensure that the total heat consumption of all devices
in the cabinet is less than or equal to the heat dissipation capability of the
cabinet.
● To prevent heat dissipation from being affected by air return, devices must be
installed at an interval of 1 U or more in the cabinet. In addition, the middle-
column cabinets support device stacking.
● Ensure that heat dissipation holes on the panel are not blocked.
● When the chassis is installed together with other equipment in the same
cabinet, do not install the chassis near the air exhaust vent of other equipment.
● Determine whether the air exhaust vent affects adjacent devices to avoid high
temperature of adjacent devices.

Installing a Chassis in a Standard 19-Inch Cabinet
1. Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is
grounded and in close contact with your wrist.
2. Install guide rails.
– Adjust the length of one guide rail according to the distance between the
front and rear mounting rails, place the guide rail horizontally at the
determined installation position in the cabinet, and hook it to the
cabinet's front and rear mounting rails.
– Install M6 screws at the front and rear sides of the guide rail, tighten
them to 3 N·m of torque to secure the guide rail to the cabinet, and then
install another guide rail in the same manner.

Figure 4-75 Installing expandable guide rails


NO TICE

Check the airflow direction of the installation site to ensure that the air flows
into the device from the cold side to the hot side.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 252
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

CA UTION

Ensure that the guide rails do not tilt inward. Install the guide rails according
to the left/right markers on the guide rails.

3. Install floating nuts. Install two floating nuts in the positions slightly above
the guide rail on each front mounting rail. As the chassis is 43.6 mm high,
install the two floating nuts in every other mounting hole.

Figure 4-76 Foating nut


NO TE

Before securing the floating nuts, ensure at least 75 mm of clearance for ventilation
on the left and right sides of the device following installation.
4. Install mounting brackets. To secure the mounting brackets to the chassis, use
a torque screwdriver to tighten the three M4 screws on each of the left and
right mounting brackets to 1.2 N·m of torque.

Figure 4-77 Install mounting brackets


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 253
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

5. Install the device into the cabinet. Facing the front of the cabinet, horizontally
slide the chassis into the cabinet until the mounting brackets are in close
contact with the mounting rails and aligned with the floating nuts. Secure the
mounting brackets to the cabinet with M6 screws.

Figure 4-78 Install the device into the cabinet


NO TE

Install the device in the cabinet when facing the front side of the cabinet.


CA UTION

Considering the weight of the device, it is recommended that at least two persons
move it to the cabinet to prevent it from falling and possibly causing injury.

4.1.6 Cable Routing Planning

Context

To ensure that power cables are connected in order, you are advised to plan power
cable routing.


NO TICE

Do not bundle or route outdoor cables (such as outdoor antenna feeders and
outdoor power cables) and indoor cables together in the cabinet or on the cable
tray.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 254
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Cable Routing Planning

It is recommended that power cables be routed on the left side of the cabinet.

It is recommended that cables, such as optical fibers, and Ethernet cables, be
routed on the left and right sides of the cabinet as the circumstances may require.

The following figures show the cable layout of the device.

Figure 4-79 Cable layout (from front side)


Figure 4-80 Cable layout (from back side)


4.1.7 Installation of cables


4.1.7.1 Installing Optical Fibers

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 255
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

● Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves before installing optical modules.
● The bending radius of a single-mode G.657A2 optical fiber is greater than or
equal to 10 mm, and the bending radius of a multi-mode A1b optical fiber is
greater than or equal to 30 mm.
● Cover empty optical interfaces and idle optical modules with dust caps.
● Do not bundle optical fibers too tightly. You must be able to conveniently
remove a single fiber from the bundle.
● Properly fix optical fibers onto the cabinet columns to prevent impact on the
surrounding devices.

1. Attach temporary labels to both ends of each optical fiber.
2. Arrange optical fibers into a bundle and feed them through the corrugated
pipe.
3. Wrap adhesive tapes on both ends of the corrugated pipe to protect it from
cuts.
4. Route the corrugated pipe along the cable ladder.
5. Insert the corrugated pipe through the dedicated cable hole on the cabinet
top to the cabinet about 100 mm and tie the pipe to the cabinet.

Figure 4-81 Inserting the corrugated pipe


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 256
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

6. Install the optical module, as shown in step 1 in Figure 4-82.
7. Route optical fibers along the cable tray, remove the dust caps from the
optical modules and optical fiber interfaces. Then connect the end of each
optical fiber to the corresponding optical interface, as shown in step 2 in
Figure 4-82.

Figure 4-82 Installing Optical Fibers


8. Connect the other end of each optical fiber to the ODF.
9. Bundle optical fibers with binding straps at an interval of 150 mm and fasten
the optical fibers to the cable tray.
10. Attach permanent labels 20 mm from both ends of each optical fiber.

4.1.7.2 Installing Network Cables


NO TICE

Before bundling network cables, use a network cable tester to test cable
connectivity.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 257
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

● Bundle the network cables in a rectangle shape. Ensure that the cable ties are evenly
spaced and face the same direction.
● Route cables at a proper distance from each other. Otherwise, the installation of other
cables may be affected.
● Route Ethernet cables, power cables, and ground cables separately. The Ethernet cables
must not be damaged or broken or have joints.
1. Attach temporary labels to both ends of each network cable.
2. Route network cables along the cable tray and plug them into corresponding
interfaces.
3. Use a network cable tester to test the connectivity of network cables.
4. Use cable ties to bundle network cables at an interval of 150 mm and fasten
the network cables to the rack.
5. Attach permanent labels 20 mm from both ends of each network cable.

Figure 4-83 Installing network cables


4.1.7.3 Installing a Cabinet Ground Cable
1. Install a cabinet ground cable.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 258
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-84 Installing a cabinet ground cable


2. Install the ground cable between the device and cabinet.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 259
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-85 Installing the ground cable between the device and cabinet


4.1.8 Post-Installation Check


CA UTION

Before starting the post-installation check, make sure that the power switches of
the external power supply system are in OFF position.

After completing installation of a device, check the items listed in the following
table. If any item fails the check, check for the reason, reinstall the related
component, and check again. Ensure that all the items pass the check.
Check cabinets according to Table 4-15.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 260
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-15 Cabinet checklist
No. Item Method

1 The cabinet installation location complies Observe
with the engineering design document.

2 Components are correctly installed in a Observe
cabinet. No component is loose or damaged.

3 All the bolts are tightened, especially those Observe
for electrical connections. The flat washers
and spring washers are installed completely
and properly.

4 The vertical deviation of a cabinet is less Measure
than 3 mm. You can use a plumb bob to
measure the vertical deviation.

5 The cabinets on the sides of the main path Measure
are aligned in a line, with a deviation of less
than 5 mm.

6 The surfaces of the cabinets in the same row Observe
are on the same plane. The cabinets are
deployed close to each other.

7 The front door of a cabinet can be opened Observe
and closed easily.

8 The cable outlets on the top and bottom of Observe
a cabinet are properly sealed.

9 Metal components in a cabinet have good Observe
electrical connections with the rack. Screw
mounting holes, guide rails, and mounting
brackets are not covered with insulation
painting.

10 Ground busbars of adjacent cabinets are Observe
connected through busbar cables.


Check cables according to Table 4-16.

Table 4-16 Cable checklist
No. Item Method

1 Routes of signal cables comply with the Observe
engineering design document.

2 Signal cables are not damaged or broken Observe
and have no splices.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 261
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

No. Item Method

3 Signal cable connectors are clean, intact, and Observe
correctly connected. Wires of each signal
cable are securely clamped in the
connectors.

4 Signal cables do not cross each other and Observe
have sufficient slack at the bent part. (Signal
cables can be crossed within 1 m outside the
cabinet.)

5 Pigtail fibers outside a cabinet are laid in a Observe
protection pipe or trough and are not
squeezed by other cables or objects.

6 Optical fibers are led into a cabinet through Observe and
a corrugated pipe. The corrugated pipe measure
should be no longer than 100 mm and be
bundled on the cabinet.

7 The bend radius of optical fibers is 20 times Observe and
larger than their diameters. Generally, the measure
bend radius of optical fibers should be no
less than 40 mm. The path of optical fibers is
not blocked by any components.

8 Optical fibers are bundled by binding tape Observe
with appropriate force.

9 Each signal cable has correct, clear, and tidy Observe
labels attached on both ends.

10 The routes of power cables and ground Observe
cables conform to the engineering design
document, facilitating future maintenance
and system expansion.

11 All power cables and ground cables are Observe
complete copper wires without splices.
Coatings of power cables and ground cables
are intact.

12 Power cables and ground cables are Observe
connected properly.

13 Power cables and ground cables are routed Observe
in compliance with the engineering design
document, meeting power distribution
requirements.

14 Power cables and ground cables are Observe
separated from signal cables.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 262
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

No. Item Method

15 Power cables and ground cables are routed Observe
straightly and properly bundled, with
sufficient slack at the bend part.

16 Power cables, ground cables, and power Observe
switches on power distribution boxes and
power distribution frames are identified by
correct, clear, and tidy labels.

17 The yellow-green ground cables are correctly Observe
connected. One end of a ground cable is
connected to the PGND ground bar in the
power distribution cabinet, and the other
end is connected to the ground point on a
cabinet. Screws at both ends of a ground
cable are securely fastened.


Check the installation environment according to Table 4-17.

Table 4-17 Installation environment checklist
No. Item Method

1 No fingerprints or other smears exist on the Observe
surface of the equipment cabinet.

2 No excessive adhesive tapes or cable ties Observe
exist on the cables.

3 No tapes, cable ties, wastepaper, or packing Observe
bags are left around the equipment.

4 All the items around the equipment are neat, Observe
clean, and intact.


4.1.9 Power-on Check


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 263
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Power-on Check Flowchart

Figure 4-86 Power-on Check Flowchart


NO TICE

The normal input voltage of the DC power supply system ranges from -40 V DC to
-72 V DC. The normal input voltage of the AC power supply system ranges from
90 V AC to 290 V AC.

Indicator description

Item Indicator Color Status Description

Working STAT Green Steady on
status The device is working properly.
indicator
Red Steady on
An alarm is generated.

Green Blinking
The card is being registered.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 264
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Item Indicator Color Status Description

Orange Blinking
The password and configuration
on the card are being cleared.

- Off
The system is not powered on or
registered.

Power module STAT Green Steady on
The power module is working
properly.

Green Blinking (1 Hz)
The power module is in the
standby state, or the power
module has been powered on but
is not installed in the system.

Green Blinking (4 Hz)
The system program is being
loaded.

Green Off
The power module is not powered
on or there is no power input.

Red Steady on
The power module encounters a
hardware fault.

Fan module STAT Green steady
The board is working properly

Red steady
The fan module is faulty

Green off
The fan module is not powered on
or encounters a hardware error


4.1.10 (Optional) Checking Optical Power

The following table describes comparison between the transmit optical power of
50 Gbps optical modules and damaged optical power threshold at the receive end:


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 265
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Optical Maximum Minimum Damaged Description
Module Type Average Average Optical
Transmit Transmit Power
Optical Optical Threshold at
Power Power the Receive
End

50GBASE-FR 3 -4.1 5.2 The damaged
optical power
50GBASE-LR 4.2 -4.5 5.2 threshold is
greater than
the maximum
average
transmit
optical power,
posting low
self-loop risks.

50GBASE-ER 6.6 0.4 -2.4 The damaged
optical power
threshold is
9dBm lower
than the
maximum
average
transmit
optical power
and 2.8dBm
lower than
the minimum
average
transmit
optical power,
posing high
self-loop risks.
In this case,
an optical
attenuator
must be
configured for
self-loop.


For applications of the 50 Gbps optical module supporting a distance of 40 km:
1. To ensure that the optical module runs stably for a long time, adjust the
receive optical power of the optical module to a value lower than -4 dB.
According to the IEEE 802.3 standard, if the receive optical power of the
optical module exceeds -2.3 dB, the optical module may be permanently
damaged.
2. Before connecting to the optical module, use an optical power meter to
measure the receive optical power (P). If P is less than -4 dB, the optical
module can be directly connected. If P is greater than -4 dB, add an optical

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 266
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

attenuator at the receive end to ensure that the receive optical power is less
than -4 dB. Alternatively, add an optical attenuator (no less than 10 dB is
recommended) before the interconnection, and then adjust the optical
attenuator based on the site requirements to prevent the optical module from
being damaged.
3. If a loopback occurs on the pigtail of the optical module or the optical
module is connected for a short distance, an optical attenuator must be
added. It is recommended that the optical attenuator be no less than 10 dB.
4.1.11 Maintenance of the device

4.1.11.1 Basic Operation Process and Precautions

Context
To ensure that the device provides uninterrupted communication services for users
in networks, parts of a device are replaced mostly when the power is on.
Therefore, to ensure safe operation of a device and to minimize the impact of
parts replacement on services, maintenance personnel must strictly abide by the
basic operation process regulated in the manual, as shown in Figure 4-87.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 267
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-87 Basic operation process of replacing parts


Procedure
1. Assess the feasibility of the operation.
During the process of troubleshooting or repairing a device, maintenance
personnel must assess whether the operation is feasible before replacing a
certain part.
a. Whether the needed spare parts are available in the depot.
b. Whether the maintenance personnel is qualified for carrying out the
operation.

NO TE

Parts replacement can be carried out only by maintenance personnel who are
professionally trained. That is, maintenance personnel must familiarize
themselves with the functions of each part of the device, know the basic
operation process of parts replacement, and master the basic skills of parts
replacement.
c. Whether the risks of the operation can be controlled.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 268
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

Parts replacement is risky to a certain extent. Hence, improper operation
may cause abnormal running of the device, service interruption, or
injuries to the personnel. Therefore, before replacing parts, maintenance
personnel must comprehensively evaluate the risks of the operation, that
is, whether the risks can be controlled through certain measures if the
system remains active. Maintenance personnel can replace the parts only
when the risks can be controlled. Otherwise, contact a Huawei local
office for timely technical support.

2. Prepare tools and spare parts.
After determining that the operation is feasible, maintenance personnel need
to prepare tools and spare parts.
a. Prepare spare parts.


NO TICE

Before replacing the component, contact Huawei engineers to see if a
license is required. You can apply for a license or use Stick License to
activate some license control items.

b. The common tools include the multimeter, cable tester, ESD wrist strap,
Phillips screwdriver, flat-head screwdriver, needle-nose pliers, cutter, and
pliers.
3. Take protective measures.
Although parts replacement is risky, in most cases, however, maintenance
personnel can prevent the risks by taking protective measures. For example,
before replacing a master board, maintenance personnel can switch services
on the master board to the slave board. After the slave board runs properly,
maintenance personnel can replace the master board. In this manner,
interruption of services is prevented.
Therefore, to ensure safe operation of a device and to minimize the impact of
parts replacement on services, maintenance personnel must take related
protective measures.
4. Replace parts.
After checking that the protective measures are available, maintenance
personnel can carry out parts replacement according to the regulations
specified in the manual.


DANGER

Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves before replacing parts when the power
is on.
Avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beam launched from the optical
interface board or fiber.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 269
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

5. Verify the functions of the new parts.
After completing part replacement, maintenance personnel must verify the
functions of the new parts through the testing methods described in this
section.

NO TE

The operation is considered successful only when the new parts are proved to be
running normally. Otherwise, contact Huawei technical support personnel.
6. Return and repair the faulty parts.
If a part that is replaced is confirmed to be faulty, maintenance personnel
should fill in the Offsite Repair Card for Faulty Materials, and send the card
and the faulty part to a Huawei local office for timely maintenance.


NO TICE

Carefully maintain the damaged control board that store data to prevent
information leak.
Before you replace the control board, delete data from it to prevent data
embezzlement.
Use either of the following methods to delete data from the control board:
● Connect the control board to a PC and then delete data from the control
board on the PC.
● Physically destroy the control board.

4.1.11.2 Replacing a power module

4.1.11.2.1 Replacing the DC Power Module

Precautions
Before replacing a power module, you need to note the following points:

Before replacing a power module, switch off the corresponding circuit breaker on
the power distribution cabinet.

Do not touch metal parts when removing or installing a power module with the
power on.

Tools
Before replacing a power module, you need the following tools:

● ESD wrist strap or ESD glove

Procedure
1. Check the location of the power module to be replaced.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 270
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Before pulling out a power module that is to be replaced, you should first
check the location of the module, for example, the cabinet and chassis where
the power module resides. Then, locate the power module to be replaced in
the chassis and attach a label to the panel to identify the power module.
2. Switch off the corresponding circuit breaker on the power distribution cabinet.
Thus, the power module to be replaced is powered off.
3. Wear the ESD wrist strap and connect the grounding terminal to the ESD jack
on the rack.
4. Disconnect power cables from the wiring terminals.
5. Hold the power module handle (callout 1 in Figure1) and horizontally pull
the power module along the direction shown by callout 2 in the Figure1.

Figure 4-88 Pull out the power module


6. Hold both sides of the power module and insert the module into the guide
rail of the slot. Ensure that the power module is in good contact with the
backplane of the chassis, as shown in Figure2.

Figure 4-89 Insert the power module


7. Connect the cables to the power module in the original sequence, and
reinstall the protective cover.
8. Switch on the corresponding circuit breaker on the power distribution cabinet.
Verify the functions of the new power module.
– If the indicator on the power module panel is steady green, the power
module works normally.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 271
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

– Run the display device command on the console interface to check the
running status of the new power module. If the Status is displayed as
Normal, it indicates that the power module runs normally.
If the fan module fails to return to the normal state, you should contact a
Huawei local office for timely technical support.

Follow-up Procedure
After replacing the power module, collect the tools. If a power module that is
replaced is confirmed to be faulty, you should fill in the Offsite Repair Card for
Faulty Materials, and send the card and the faulty power module to a Huawei
local office for timely maintenance.

4.1.11.2.2 Replacing the AC Power Module

Precautions
Before replacing a power module, you need to note the following points:
Before replacing a power module, switch off the corresponding circuit breaker on
the power distribution cabinet.

Tools
Before replacing a power module, you need the following tools:
● ESD wrist strap or ESD glove

Procedure
1. Check the location of the power module to be replaced.
Before pulling out a power module that is to be replaced, you should first
check the location of the module, for example, the cabinet and chassis where
the power module resides. Then, locate the power module to be replaced in
the chassis and attach a label to the panel to identify the power module.
2. Switch off the corresponding circuit breaker on the power distribution cabinet.
Thus, the power module to be replaced is powered off.
3. Wear the ESD wrist strap and connect the grounding terminal to the ESD jack
on the rack.
4. Disconnect power cables from the wiring terminals.
5. Hold the power module handle (callout 1 in Figure1) and horizontally pull
the power module along the direction shown by callout 2 in the Figure1.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 272
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-90 Pull out the power module


6. Hold both sides of the power module and insert the module into the guide
rail of the slot. Ensure that the power module is in good contact with the
backplane of the chassis, as shown in Figure2.

Figure 4-91 Insert the power module


7. Connect the cables to the power module in the original sequence, and
reinstall the protective cover.
8. Switch on the corresponding circuit breaker on the power distribution cabinet.
Verify the functions of the new power module.
– If the indicator on the power module panel is steady green, the power
module works normally.
– Run the display device command on the console interface to check the
running status of the new power module. If the Status is displayed as
Normal, it indicates that the power module runs normally.
If the fan module fails to return to the normal state, you should contact a
Huawei local office for timely technical support.

Follow-up Procedure
After replacing the power module, collect the tools. If a power module that is
replaced is confirmed to be faulty, you should fill in the Offsite Repair Card for
Faulty Materials, and send the card and the faulty power module to a Huawei
local office for timely maintenance.

4.1.11.3 Replacing the Fan Module

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 273
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Precautions
● To ensure that system heat dissipation is not affected, a fan module must be
replaced within one minute.
● The fans are exposed on the left side of the fan tray. Keep your fingers,
clothing, and jewelry away from the fans. Always handle the fan tray by the
handle.
● Do not touch the fan when the fan is rotating.

Tools
● ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

Procedure
1. Check the location of the fan module to be replaced.
Before removing the old fan module, check its location, for example, the
cabinet and chassis where the fan module resides. Then, find the fan module
to be replaced in the chassis and attach a label to the panel to identify the
fan module to avoid misoperation.
2. Wear the ESD wrist strap and connect the ground terminal to the ESD jack on
the chassis.
3. Lift the latch on the fan module to be replaced, as shown by callout 1 in
Figure1. Hold the handle of the fan module with one hand and pull it out
slowly, as shown by callout 2 in Figure1. When the fan module is half out,
support its bottom with the other hand and keep on pulling it out until it is
completely out of the chassis.

Figure 4-92 Pull out the fan module


4. Hold the handle on the new fan module with one hand and support the
bottom of the fan module with the other hand. Then, insert the fan module
into the chassis, as shown in Figure2.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 274
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-93 Insert the fan module


5. Verify the function of the new fan module.
In normal situations, after the new fan module is inserted into the chassis, the
fans inside it immediately start to roatate. In this case, you can check whether
the new fan module functions normally in the following manners:
– If the FAN indicator on the panel of the fan module is on and green, it
indicates that the fan module runs normally.
If the indicator is red, it indicates that the fan module fails to run normally. If
the new fan module fails to return to the normal state, contact Huawei
technical personnel.

Follow-up Procedure
After replacing a part, collect the tools. If the part is faulty, maintenance personnel
should fill in the Offsite Repair Card for Faulty Materials, and send the card and
the faulty part to Huawei for timely maintenance.

4.1.11.4 Replacing an Optical Module

Context


CA UTION

Laser beams will cause eye damage. Do not look into bores of Optical Modules or
optical fibers without eye protection.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 275
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

● Huawei-certified Optical Modules are strongly recommended because non-
Huawei-certified Optical Modules cannot ensure transmission reliability and
may affect service stability.
● Optical Modules are hot swappable, and you do not need to power off the
device when replacing Optical Modules.
● Optical Modules are electrostatic-sensitive components. Therefore, you must
take ESD protection measures when replacing Optical Modules.
● Only external Optical Modules can be replaced and pluggable. Built-in Optical
Modules cannot be replaced.

Follow these guidelines when replacing an Optical Module:

● Replacing an Optical Module interrupts service transmission. Therefore,
replace an Optical Module only when you confirm that the Optical Module
has failed.
● Ensure that the new Optical Module has the same center wavelength and
complies with the same standards as the old one.
● When replacing an Optical Module, ensure that no optical fiber is connected
to the Optical Module. Install or remove optical fibers carefully to avoid
damages to fiber connectors. Exercise caution when installing or removing
optical fibers to prevent damage to the Optical Module.
● After removing the optical fibers from an Optical Module, cover the fiber
connectors with dust caps. Place the optical fibers in an appropriate place to
prevent them from swinging.
● Use assistant tools like the tweezers delivered with the device to remove an
Optical Module in a confined space.
● After removing a copper transceiver, wait at least 2 seconds before inserting a
new one. Otherwise, the port may fail to go Up. If the port cannot go Up,
remove the copper transceiver and install it 2 seconds later.
● If the LINK indicator on an optical port with two optical fibers is off, swap the
two optical fibers.
● During the replacement, keep the bores of the Optical Module and fiber
connectors clean, protecting them from dust and other contamination
sources. Install dust plugs on idle optical ports.

Tools and Accessories
● ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
● Spare Optical Module
● Dust caps
● (Optional) Optical port dust plug
● (Optional) Tweezers

Procedure
1. Check the location of the Optical Module to be replaced.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 276
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Before pulling out an Optical Module that is to be replaced, you should first
check the location of the module, for example, the cabinet and chassis where
the Optical Module resides. Then, locate the Optical Module to be replaced in
the chassis and attach a label to the panel to identify the Optical Module.
2. Run the display interface interface-type interface-number command to view
and record the type of the Optical Module to be replaced, as the following
output in bold displays:
<HUAWEI> display interface Gigabitethernet0/1/0
GigabitEthernet0/1/0 current state : DOWN
Line protocol current state : DOWN
Description: HUAWEI, GigabitEthernet0/1/0 Interface (ifindex: 7)
Route Port,The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 001a-2b11-4d51
The Vendor PN is RTXM191-400
The Vendor Name is WTD
Port BW: 1G, Transceiver max BW: 1G, Transceiver Mode: SingleMode
WaveLength: 1310nm, Transmission Distance: 10km
Rx Power: -1.43dBm, normal range: [-19.014, -3.000]dBm
Tx Power: -4.86dBm, normal range: [-6.859, -2.857]dBm
Loopback:none, full-duplex mode, negotiation: disable, Pause Flowcontrol:Receive Enable and
Send Enable
Last physical up time : 2012-10-11 10:01:20
Last physical down time : 2012-10-11 10:01:19
Current system time: 2012-10-12 09:53:44
Statistics last cleared:2012-10-12 09:02:03
Last 300 seconds input rate: 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Last 300 seconds output rate: 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Input peak rate 88 bits/sec, Record time: 2012-10-12 09:03:45
Output peak rate 78 bits/sec, Record time: 2012-10-12 09:02:54
Input: 2144 bytes, 22 packets
Output: 614 bytes, 7 packets
Input:
Unicast: 21 packets, Multicast: 1 packets
Broadcast: 0 packets, JumboOctets: 0 packets
CRC: 0 packets, Symbol: 0 packets
Overrun: 0 packets, InRangeLength: 0 packets
LongPacket: 0 packets, Jabber: 0 packets, Alignment: 0 packets
Fragment: 0 packets, Undersized Frame: 0 packets
RxPause: 0 packets
Output:
Unicast: 6 packets, Multicast: 1 packets
Broadcast: 0 packets, JumboOctets: 0 packets
Lost: 0 packets, Overflow: 0 packets, Underrun: 0 packets
System: 0 packets, Overruns: 0 packets
TxPause: 0 packets
Last 300 seconds input utility rate: 0.00%
Last 300 seconds output utility rate: 0.00%
3. Record the location of the cables and check whether the labels on the cables
are correct and clear. If the labels are hard to identify, re-make labels and re-
label the cables in case the cables are not connected properly.
4. Wear the ESD gloves or wrist strap and connect the grounding terminal to the
ESD jack on the rack.
5. Pull out the Optical Module to be replaced.
a. Remove the optical cables from the connector and cover the connector
with a dust cap.
b. Pull the bail-clasp or pull-tab latch on the optical module, as shown in
Figure2 and Figure3 respectively.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 277
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

When the operation space is insufficient, you can use a fiber interface clamp to
remove an Optical Module. Figure1 shows the appearance of a fiber interface
clamp.

Figure 4-94 Fiber interface clamp


c. Hold the handle to pull out the Optical Module carefully from the optical
interface, as (2) shown in Figure2. When installing a CFP Optical Module,
hold the screw rods with both hands, and slightly pull out the Optical
Module from the optical port.


CA UTION

The QSFP28 and QSFP-DD modules will get very hot during operation. To
prevent injuries, do not touch the module shells when removing the
modules.

d. Place the removed Optical Module in the ESD bag.

Figure 4-95 Pulling out an bail-clasp Optical Module


Figure 4-96 pull-tab latchPulling out an Optical Module


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 278
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

6. Insert the new Optical Module into the optical interface.
a. Take out the new Optical Module from the ESD bag and check whether
there is any damage or component missing. Check whether the new
Optical Module is of the same type as the Optical Module to be replaced.
b. Insert the new Optical Module into the optical interface, as shown in
Figure 4-97. When the click of the reed in the Optical Module is heard, it
indicates that the Optical Module is correctly inserted. If the new Optical
Module is a CFP one, insert the new Optical Module into the optical port
of the card, push the transceiver panel horizontally into the connector
using even force with both thumbs. After the transceiver is inserted, push
the transceiver slightly to ensure that it has reached the stop position.
Pull out the two screw rods slightly to ensure that they can properly
function. Pre-tighten one of the screw rods. Then, tighten the other screw
rod. After that, tighten the first screw rod. To prevent the Optical Module
from getting loosened due to vibration or collision, you are advised to use
a screwdriver to tighten the screw rods.


CA UTION

Do not insert an Optical Module reversely. If an Optical Module cannot
be completely inserted into an optical port, do not force it into the port.
Instead, turn the Optical Module over and try again.

Figure 4-97 Inserting an Optical Module


c. Remove the dust cap from the connector and insert the optical cables in
the original sequence.
7. Verify the functions of the new Optical Module.
Then, you can verify the functions of the new Optical Module in the following
ways:
– Check whether the LINK indicator on the optical interface works
normally. If the indicator is green, it indicates that the links connected to
the interface are Up.
– Run the display interface interface-type interface-number command on
the console interface to view the type and running status of the new
Optical Module. Check whether the type of the new Optical Module

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 279
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

corresponds to that of the original Optical Module, as the following
output in bold displays:
<HUAWEI> display interface Gigabitethernet0/1/0
GigabitEthernet0/1/0 current state : DOWN
Line protocol current state : DOWN
Description: HUAWEI, GigabitEthernet0/1/0 Interface (ifindex: 7)
Route Port,The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 001a-2b11-4d51
The Vendor PN is RTXM191-400
The Vendor Name is WTD
Port BW: 1G, Transceiver max BW: 1G, Transceiver Mode: SingleMode
WaveLength: 1310nm, Transmission Distance: 10km
Rx Power: -1.43dBm, normal range: [-19.014, -3.000]dBm
Tx Power: -4.86dBm, normal range: [-6.859, -2.857]dBm
Loopback:none, full-duplex mode, negotiation: disable, Pause Flowcontrol:Receive Enable
and Send Enable
Last physical up time : 2012-10-11 10:01:20
Last physical down time : 2012-10-11 10:01:19
Current system time: 2012-10-12 09:53:44
Statistics last cleared:2012-10-12 09:02:03
Last 300 seconds input rate: 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Last 300 seconds output rate: 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Input peak rate 88 bits/sec, Record time: 2012-10-12 09:03:45
Output peak rate 78 bits/sec, Record time: 2012-10-12 09:02:54
Input: 2144 bytes, 22 packets
Output: 614 bytes, 7 packets
Input:
Unicast: 21 packets, Multicast: 1 packets
Broadcast: 0 packets, JumboOctets: 0 packets
CRC: 0 packets, Symbol: 0 packets
Overrun: 0 packets, InRangeLength: 0 packets
LongPacket: 0 packets, Jabber: 0 packets, Alignment: 0 packets
Fragment: 0 packets, Undersized Frame: 0 packets
RxPause: 0 packets
Output:
Unicast: 6 packets, Multicast: 1 packets
Broadcast: 0 packets, JumboOctets: 0 packets
Lost: 0 packets, Overflow: 0 packets, Underrun: 0 packets
System: 0 packets, Overruns: 0 packets
TxPause: 0 packets
Last 300 seconds input utility rate: 0.00%
Last 300 seconds output utility rate: 0.00%
– Check whether there is any new alarm or performance event.
– Check whether the services are normal on the new Optical Module. If the
services are normal, it indicates that replacing an Optical Module is
successful.
If the new Optical Module fails to return to the normal state, you should
contact a Huawei local office for timely technical support.

Follow-up Procedure
After replacing an Optical Module, collect the tools. If an Optical Module that is
replaced and is confirmed to be faulty, you should fill in the Offsite Repair Card
for Faulty Materials, and send the card and the faulty Optical Module to a Huawei
local office for timely maintenance.

4.1.11.5 Replacing an Optical Cable

Context
Before replacing an optical cable, you need to note the flowing points:

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 280
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● During the process of replacing an optical cable, the services are interrupted
temporarily.
● Be careful when you remove or insert an optical cable in case that the
connector of the optical cable is damaged.
● When installing or maintaining an optical interface board or an optical cable,
do not observe an optical interface or connectors of an optical cable.
● The bending radius of a single-mode G.657A2 optical fiber is greater than or
equal to 10 mm, and the bending radius of a multi-mode A1b optical fiber is
greater than or equal to 30 mm.
● Connectors of optical cables are divided into the LC type and the SC type. You
must select an optical cable according to the interface type.

Tool

Before replacing an optical cable, you need the following tools:

● Cutter
● Binding strap
● ESD wrist strap or ESD glove

Procedure
1. Record the location of both ends of the optical cable to be replaced and the
cabling mode.
2. Take out the new optical cable and check whether the type of the new optical
cable is consistent with that of the old one. The multi-mode optical cable is
orange and the single-mode optical cable is yellow.
3. Make a new label according to the contents of the label on the old optical
cable.
4. Lay out the new optical cable in the original place.
5. Remove the old optical cable.
a. Put on the ESD gloves or wrist strap and connect the grounding terminal
to the ESD jack on the rack.
b. Hold the connectors and remove them. Then, cover the connectors with
dust caps.

NO TE

If a connector is dusty, clean it with dust-free cloth or fiber cleaning paper.
c. Remove the old optical cable from the corrugated pipe.
6. Insert the new optical cable.
Before inserting the new optical cable, remove the dust caps and keep them
properly for future use. Then, connect both ends of the new optical cable to
the optical interfaces and secure the optical cables.
7. Attach a label to the new optical cable, as shown in Figure 4-98.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 281
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-98 Attaching a label to a new optical cable


8. Lay out the new optical cable in a tidy manner in the cabinet and bind the
optical cable with a binding strap. Note that the optical cable should be
bound with proper strength and with even space in between. Bind the
redundancies of the optical cable at the ODF side.
9. Check whether the new optical cable works normally.
a. Check the LINK indicator at the optical interface. If the indicator is steady
on and green, it indicates that the link is Up.
b. Check whether the service on the board where the new optical cable
connects is normal. If the services are normal, it indicates that the optical
cable is replaced successfully.
c. Check whether there is any new alarm or performance event.

Follow-up Procedure

After replacing an optical cable, collect the tools and the replaced optical cable.
Do not place the old and the new optical cables together to avoid confusions.

4.1.11.6 Replacing a Network Cable

Context

Before replacing a network cable, you need to note the following points:

● During the process of replacing a network cable, the services are interrupted
temporarily.
● It is recommended that you replace a network cable during the hours when
the network is not busy, for example, from 00:00 am to 06:00 am.

Tool

Before replacing a network cable, you need the following tools:

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 282
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Cutter
● Cable tie
● ESD wrist strap or ESD glove
● Cable tester
● Crimper

Procedure
1. Check the location and cabling of the network cable to be replaced.
2. Prepare a new network cable. The type of the new network cable must be
consistent with that of the old network cable. When a network cable is made,
test its connectivity with a cable tester.
3. Wear the ESD gloves or wrist strap and connect the grounding terminal to the
ESD jack on the rack.
4. Lay out the new network cable according to the original cabling mode.
If you need to replace more than one network cable at a time, you should
attach temporary labels to the new network cables to identify the cables. The
new network cables must be numbered consistently with the network cables
to be replaced.
5. Remove the old network cable and record the location where the old network
cable is installed.
a. Remove the connectors of the network cable.
b. Cut the cable tie with a cutter and remove the network cable.
6. Insert the new network cable connector into the network interface of which
the location is recorded. If a click is heard, it indicates that the insertion is
successful. The indicator of the network interface being steady on and green
indicates that the link is Up.
7. Attach a label to the new network cable, as shown in Figure 4-99.

Figure 4-99 Attaching a label to a new network cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 283
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

8. Bind the cable with a cable tie and cut the redundancies of the tie.
9. Run the ping command to check the connection between both ends of the
new network cable. If both ends fail to communicate normally, check whether
the network cable is damaged or whether the connectors are secured.

Follow-up Procedure
After replacing a network cable, collect the tools and the replaced cable. Do not
place the old and the new cables together to avoid confusions.
4.1.12 Appendix

4.1.12.1 Environmental Requirements for Device Operation

4.1.12.1.1 Environmental Requirements for Equipment Room

Requirements for Selecting a Site for Equipment Room

When designing a project, consider the communication network planning and
technical requirements of the equipment. Also consider hydrographic, geological,
seismic, power supply, and transportation factors.
Construction, structure, heating and ventilation, power supply, lighting and fire-
proof construction of the equipment room should be designed by specialized
construction designers to suit the environmental requirements of devices. The
equipment room should also follow local regulations concerning the industrial
construction, environmental protection, fire safety, and civil air defense.
Construction must conform to government standards, regulations, and other
requirements.
The equipment room should be located in a place free from high temperature,
dust, toxic gases, explosive materials, or unstable voltage. Keep the equipment
room away from significant vibrations or loud noises, as well as power transformer
stations.
The specific requirements for selecting a site for an equipment room are as
follows:
● The room should be located at a distance of at least 5 km (3.11 mi.) from
heavy pollution sources such as smelting and coal mines. It should be located
at a distance of at least 3.7 km (2.30 mi.) from moderate pollution sources
such as chemical, rubber, and galvanization factories. It should be located at a
distance of at least 2 km (1.24 mi.) from light pollution sources such as
packinghouses and tanyards. If these pollution sources cannot be avoided,
ensure that the equipment room is upwind of the pollution sources. In
addition, use a high-quality equipment room or protection products.
● The room should be located away from livestock farms, or be upwind of the
livestock farms. Do not use an old livestock room or fertilizer warehouse as
the equipment room.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 284
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● The equipment room must be far away from residential areas. An equipment
room that is not far away from residential areas must comply with equipment
room construction standards to avoid noise pollution.
● The room should be located far away from industrial and heating boilers.
● The room should be at least 3.7 km (2.30 mi.) away from the seaside or salt
lake. Otherwise, the equipment room should be airtight with cooling facilities.
In addition, alkalized soil cannot be used as the construction material.
Otherwise, equipment suitable for wet conditions must be used.
● The doors and windows of the equipment room must be kept closed to
maintain an airtight room.
● Using steel doors to ensure sound insulation is recommended.
● No cracks or openings are allowed on the walls or floors. The outlet holes on
the walls or windows must be sealed. Walls must be constructed such that
they are smooth, wear-resistant, dustproof, flame retardant, sound insulated,
heat absorptive, and have electromagnetic shielding.
● The air vent of the room should be far from the exhaust of city waste pipes,
big cesspools and sewage treatment tanks. The room should be in the positive
pressure state to prevent corrosive gases from entering the equipment room
and corroding components and circuit boards.
● It is recommended that the room be on or above the second floor. If this
requirement cannot be met, the ground for equipment installation in the
room should be at least 600 mm (23.62 in, ) above the maximum flood level.
● The equipment room should be strong enough to resist winds and downpours.
● The room should be located away from dusty roads or sand. If this is
unavoidable, the doors and windows of the equipment room must not face
pollution sources.
● Do not place air conditioning vents near the equipment so that they blow
directly on the equipment because condensation may be blown into the
equipment.
● Do not use decorative materials that contain sulfur in the equipment room.

Equipment Room Layout

An equipment room usually contains mobile switching equipment,
telecommunications equipment, power supply equipment, and other auxiliary
equipment. To ensure easy maintenance and management, place the equipment
in different rooms. Figure 4-100 shows the layout of the equipment room.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 285
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-100 Layout of the equipment room


The general layout principles of the equipment room are as follows:
● It should meet requirements for laying out and maintaining communication
cables and power cables.
● It should reduce the cabling distance, which facilitates cable maintenance,
reduces potential communication faults, and maximizes efficiency.

Construction Requirements for the Equipment Room

Table 4-18 describes the construction requirements for the equipment room.

Table 4-18 Construction requirements for the equipment room
Item Requirements

Area The smallest area of the equipment room can accommodate the
equipment with the largest capacity.

Net height The minimum height of the equipment room should not be less
than 3 m (9.84 ft). The minimum height of the equipment room
is the net height below overhead beams or ventilation pipes.

Floor The floor in the equipment room should be semi-conductive and
dustproof. A raised floor with an ESD covering is recommended.
Cover the raised floor tightly and solidly. The horizontal
tolerance of each square meter should be less than 2 mm (0.08
in.). If raised floors are unavailable, use a static-electricity-
conductive floor material, with a volume resistivity of 1.0 x 10^7
ohms to 1.0 x 10^10 ohms. Ground this floor material or raised
floor. You can connect them to ground using a one megohm
current-limiting resistor and connection line.

Load-bearing The floor must bear loads larger than 561 kg/m2 (0.79 bf/in.2).
capacity


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 286
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Item Requirements

Door and The door of the equipment room should be 2 m (6.56 ft) high
windows and 1 m (3.28 ft) wide. One door is enough. Seal the doors and
windows with dustproof plastic tape. Use double-pane glass in
the windows and seal them tightly.

Wall surface Paste wallpaper on the wall or apply flat paint. Do not use
treatment pulverized paint.

Cable trays Use cable trays to arrange cables. The inner faces of the cable
trays must be smooth. The reserved length and width of the
cable trays, and the number, position and dimensions of the
holes must comply with the requirements of device
arrangement.

Water pipe Do not pass service pipes, drainpipes, and storm sewers through
the equipment room. Do not place a fire hydrant in the
equipment room, but place it in the corridor or near the
staircase.

Internal Separate the area where the equipment is installed from the
partition wall equipment room door. The partition wall can block some outside
dust. As shown in Figure 4-101.

Installation Install air conditioner vents so that the air does not blow directly
position of on equipment.
the air
conditioner

Other Avoid the proliferation of mildew, and keep out rodents (like
requirements mice).



Figure 4-101 Internal partition wall inside the equipment room


Equipment Room Environment


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 287
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Dust on devices may cause electrostatic discharge and result in poor contact for
connectors or metal connection points. This problem can shorten the life span of
devices and cause faults.
The equipment room must be free from explosive, conductive, magnetically-
permeable, and corrosive dust. Table 4-19 lists the requirement for dust
concentration in the equipment room.

Table 4-19 Requirements for dust particles in the equipment room
Mechanical active Unit Concentration
material

Dust particle Particle /m3 ≤ 3x 104
(no visible dust
accumulated on a
workbench in three
days)

Suspending dust mg/m3 ≤0.2

Precipitable dust mg/m2·h ≤1.5

NOTE
● Dust particle diameter ≥ 5 µm
● Suspending dust diameter ≤ 75 µm
● 75 µm ≤ precipitable dust diameter ≤ 150 µm



Take the following measures to meet the requirements:
● Use dustproof materials for ground, wall, and ceiling construction.
● Use screens on the door and windows facing outside. The outer windows
should be dust-proof.
● Clean the equipment room regularly and clean the air filter door monthly.
● Wear shoe covers and ESD clothing before entering the equipment room.

Requirements for Corrosive Gases

The room should be free from dusts and corrosive gases, such as SO2, H2S, and
NH3. Table 4-20 lists the requirements for the corrosive gas concentration.

Table 4-20 Requirements for corrosive gas concentration
Chemical Unit Concentration
active material

3
SO2 mg/m ≤0.30

3
H2S mg/m ≤0.10

3
NOx mg/m ≤0.50

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 288
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Chemical Unit Concentration
active material

3
NH3 mg/m ≤1.00

3
Cl2 mg/m ≤0.10

HCl mg/m3 ≤0.10

HF mg/m3 ≤0.01

3
O3 mg/m ≤0.05



Take the following measures to meet the requirements:
● Avoid constructing the room near a place where the corrosive gas
concentration is high, such as a chemical plant.
● Ensure the air intake vent of the room is in the prevailing upwind direction
from any pollution source.
● Place batteries in different rooms.
● A professional service should monitor the corrosive gas conditions regularly.

Requirements for ESD Prevention

The absolute value of electrostatic voltage must be less than 1000 V.
Take the following measures to meet this requirement:
● Train operators about ESD prevention.
● Keep the correct humidity level in the equipment room to reduce the impact
of static electricity.
● Lay out an ESD floor in equipment rooms.
● Wear ESD shoes and clothing before entering equipment room.
● Use ESD tools, such as wrist straps, tweezers, and pullers.
● Ground all conductive materials in the room, including computer terminals.
Use ESD worktables.
● Keep non-ESD materials (such as common bags, foam, and rubber) at least
30 cm (11.81 in.) away from boards and ESD-sensitive components.

Electromagnetism Requirements for the Equipment Room

All interference sources, inside or outside the equipment room, can cause
equipment problems with capacitive coupling, inductive coupling, electromagnetic
wave radiation, and common impedance (including grounding system) coupling.
Prevent the interference using these approaches:
● Take effective measures against electrical interference from the power supply
system.
● Do not use the working ground of the equipment as the same ground for
surge protection. Separate them as far as possible.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 289
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Keep the equipment far away from high-power radio transmitters, radar units,
and high-frequency and high-current equipment.
● Use electromagnetic shielding if necessary.

Requirements for Lightning Proof Grounding

Table 4-21 lists the requirements for lightning proof grounding.

Table 4-21 Requirements for lightning proof grounding
Item Requirements

Capital ● Use reinforced concrete to construct the equipment room.
construction ● Install a lightning proof device like a lightning rod outside
the room.
● The lightning proof ground shares the same grounding
body with the protective ground of the room.

Power cables ● After the AC low-voltage power cables are led into the
leading in the room, install the surge protector for the power cables in the
equipment AC voltage stabilizer and the AC power distribution panel
room need to (box). Correctly ground the surge protector nearby.
be equipped ● After the DC power cable is led into the equipment room or
with a surge outdoor cabinet from outdoors or outside the cabinet,
protector install a power lightning protection device for the DC power
cable. The lightning protection device should be grounded
in proximity.
● For an equipment room in urban area, install a power
supply surge protector with the nominal discharge current
of no less than 20 kA. For an equipment room that is built
in a suburb and subject to lightning strikes, install a power
supply surge protector with the nominal discharge current
of more than 60 kA. For an equipment room that is built in
a mountain area and subject to frequent lightning strikes,
or in a separate high-rise building in a city, install a power
supply surge protector with the nominal discharge current
of more than 100 kA.
● The ground cable of the surge protector should be no
longer than 1 m (3.28 ft).

Grounding for ● Connect the DC working ground (positive pole of the -48 V
DC power DC power supply or the negative pole of the 24 V DC power
distribution supply) with the indoor collective ground cable nearby. The
total ground cable should meet the maximum load of the
equipment.
● The power equipment must have a DC working ground
cable, which can connect the power equipment to the
collective ground cable of the telecommunication site (or
the protective ground bar of the equipment room).


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 290
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Item Requirements

Equipotential ● Properly ground the devices and auxiliary devices in the
connection room such as mobile base station, transmission, switching
equipment, power supply equipment, and cable distribution
frame. Connect all PGND cables to the collective protective
ground bar. Connect all PGND cables in one equipment
room to one protective ground bar.
● Apply joint grounding to the working ground and protective
ground of devices, which means the two share one
grounding network.
● The cable tray, rack or shell, metal ventilation pipe, metal
door or window of the equipment should be grounded for
protection.

General ● Do not connect the neutral line of the AC power cable with
requirements the protective ground of any telecom equipment in the
for grounding equipment room.
● Do not install a fuse or switch on the ground cable.
● All ground cables should be as short as possible, and
arranged in a straight line.

Grounding ● The grounding resistance must be lower than 1 ohm.
resistance ● The upper end of the grounding body should be at least 0.7
m (2.30 ft) over the ground. In cold areas, bury the
grounding body below the frozen ground.
● Measure the grounding resistance periodically to ensure
effective grounding.

Routing of ● Do not arrange the signal cables overhead in the
signal cable equipment room. All signal cables must be led into the site
underground.
● Use the cables with a metal jacket or place them into a
metal pipe if they come out/in the equipment room.
● Ground the idle lines inside the cable in the equipment
room.
● Signal cables should be deployed on internal walls. Do not
deploy outdoor aerial cables.
● Keep signal cables away from power cables and surge
protection devices.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 291
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Item Requirements

Collective ● Use a ground ring or ground bar for the collective ground
ground cable cable.
● Do not use aluminum cables as ground cables. Adopt
measures to prevent electrification corrosion when
connecting different metal parts together.
● Use a copper busbar as the collective ground cable with a
cross-sectional area of no less than 120 mm2 (0.19 in.2), or
use the galvanized flat steel of the same resistance. Insulate
the collective ground cable from the reinforcing steel bars
of the building.

Grounding The grounding lead-in should be a maximum of 30 m (98.42
lead-in ft) long. Use the galvanized flat steel with cross-sectional area
of 40 mm x 4 mm (1.58 in. x 0.158 in.) or 50 mm x 5 mm
(1.97 in. x 0.197 in.).



4.1.12.1.2 Requirements for Power Supply


Requirements for DC Power Supply

The equipment room should receive stable and reliable DC power. Deploy the
power equipment near the telecommunications equipment to make the DC feeder
as short as possible. To reduce power consumption and installation cost, the loop
voltage drop from the battery port to the equipment port should be less than 3.2
V.

● A large-scale enterprise can deploy an independent power supply system on
each floor to supply power to the telecommunications equipment room on
the respective floor.
● A medium-scale enterprise can use a power room and a battery room for
centralized power supply or use distributed power supply systems.
● A small-scale enterprise can deploy an integrated power supply system in its
equipment room but must take measures to prevent corrosive gases released
from batteries from eroding circuit boards of telecommunications equipment.

Table 4-22 lists the specifications for the DC power supply.

Table 4-22 Specifications for the DC power supply

Item Requirements

DC power Greater than 1.5 times the rated current
capacity to
support the
surge current

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 292
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Item Requirements

Regulated If the AC input voltage is in the range of 85% to 110% of the
voltage rated value, and the load current is in the range of 5% to
precision 100% of the rated value, the output voltage of the rectifier
ranges from -46.0 V to -56.4 V, with the regulated voltage
precision less than or equal to 1%.

Overshoot Integral value of the DC output voltage ±5%
amplitude of
switch on/off

Peak noise ≤200 mV
voltage

Dynamic The recovery time is less than 200 ms. The overshoot is in the
response range of the integral value of the DC output voltage ±5%.



Recommendations for DC Power Supply

The following are recommendations for the DC power supply.
● Use distributed power supply mode. Use multiple DC power supply systems
and put power equipment in multiple locations.
● Adopt a standard DC power supply system, and set the output voltage to the
communications equipment within the required range.
● Improve reliability of the AC power supply system to reduce the necessary
capacity of storage batteries. For small offices, increase the capacity of
storage batteries if it is difficult to enhance reliability of the AC power supply
system.
● The total capacity of the high-frequency switching rectifier must satisfy the
power of the communication loading and battery charging. If there are 10 or
fewer active rectifier modules, configure one backup module. If there are
more than 10 active modules, configure one backup module for every 10
active modules.
● Install storage batteries in two or more groups. The capacity is determined by
the duration for which the storage batteries must supply power. For most
offices, the batteries should be able to supply power for at least one hour.

4.1.12.2 On-site Cable Assembly and Installation

4.1.12.2.1 Cable Assembly Precautions

Checking the Appearance of Cables
● If the cable jacket or insulation is visibly dirty, clean it before assembly.
● If the jacket or insulation of a cable has visible damage, irreparable scuffing,
or other defects, do not use the cable.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 293
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● If the shield layer of a cable is damaged, do not use the cable.
● If the cable jacket or insulation cracks after the cable is bent or twisted,
discard this cable and check whether other cables have the same problem. If
other cables have the same problem, replace these cables.

Checking the Appearance of Connectors
● Do not use connectors with visible defects, damage, rust, or scuffing.
● Do not use connectors if their shells or pins have exposed part or uneven
plating, or their pins are lost, broken, or bent.
● Do not use connectors that have dirt on their pins or in their jacks or if there
are conductors between pins or between pins and the shell.

Precautions for Assembly
● Use dedicated tools or tools delivered by Huawei and follow the methods
given here during assembly.
● Hold terminals of cables instead of pulling the cables themselves when
installing or removing cable components.
● Take the following precautions when cutting or stripping cables:
– Make cables slightly longer than necessary.
– Coil cables longer than 2 m (6.56 ft) after cutting. Bind and fasten the
coils using bundling ropes. The inner diameters of the coils should be
larger than 20 times the outer diameters of the cables.
– When stripping the jackets of cables, avoid damaging the shield layers
(braid or aluminum foil), insulation, core conductors, and other jackets
that do not need to be stripped.
– After assembling cables, cut all visible cross sections of jackets to ensure
that the cross sections are arranged neatly.
– Do not touch the core conductors of cables with your hands. Terminate
exposed conductors in a timely way after stripping off insulation so that
the surface of the conductors does not become oxidized.
● Take the following precautions when crimping and connecting cables or
connectors:
– The terminals and conductors should be connected tightly after they are
crimped. They should not be moved or turned.
– Cut all the exposed copper wires.
– Try to avoid a second crimping of sleeves.
– Keep all the conductors clean and aligned.

NO TE

The connectors, cables, and tools provided by different vendors may be different. The
figures in this document are for your reference only.

4.1.12.2.2 Assembling Power Cables

Assembling the OT Terminal and Power Cable

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 294
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Background
Figure 4-102 shows the components of an OT terminal and a power cable.

Figure 4-102 the components of an OT terminal and a power cable


A. Heat shrink B. Bare crimping C. Insulation D. Conductor
tubing terminal

Procedure
1. Based on the cross-sectional area of the cable conductor, strip a length of
insulation coating C to expose the conductor D of length L1, as shown in
Figure 4-103. The recommended values of L1 are listed in Table 4-23.

Figure 4-103 Stripping a power cable (OT terminal)


NO TICE

● When you strip a power cable, do not damage the conductor of the cable.
● If the bare crimping terminal is not provided by Huawei, the value of L1 is
1 mm (0.04 in.) to 2 mm (0.08 in.) greater than the value of L.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 295
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-23 Mapping between the cross-sectional area of the conductor and
the value of L1

Cross- Value of L1 (mm Cross-Sectional Value of L1 (mm
Sectional (in.)) Area of (in.))
Area of Conductor (mm2
Conductor (in.2))
(mm2 (in.2))

1 (0.002) 7 (0.28) 10 (0.015) 11 (0.43)

1.5 (0.002) 7 (0.28) 16 (0.025) 13 (0.51)

2.5 (0.004) 7 (0.28) 25 (0.039) 14 (0.55)

4 (0.006) 8 (0.31) 35 (0.054) 16 (0.63)

6 (0.009) 9 (0.35) 50 (0.077) 16 (0.63)



NO TE

If you are proficient in assembling OT terminals and power cables, you can obtain the
value of L1 by comparing the part to be crimped with the power cable.
2. Put the heat-shrinkable (A) tubing onto the bare crimping terminal, as shown
in Figure 4-104.

Figure 4-104 Putting the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimping terminal


3. Put the OT terminal B onto the exposed conductor, and ensure that the OT
terminal is in good contact with the insulation coating C, as shown in Figure
4-104.


NO TICE

After the conductor is fed into the OT terminal, the protruding part of the
conductor, or L2 in Figure 4-104, must not be longer than 2 mm (0.08 in.).

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 296
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4. Crimp the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the conductor, as
shown in Figure 4-105.

NO TE

The shapes of crimped parts may vary with the crimping dies.

Figure 4-105 Crimping the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the
conductor (OT terminal)


5. Push the heat shrink tubing (A) toward the connector until the tube covers
the crimped part, and then use a heat gun to heat the tube, as shown in
Figure 4-106.

Figure 4-106 Heating the heat shrink tubing (OT terminal)


NO TICE

Stop heating the shrink tubing when the connector is securely locked in the
shrink tubing. Do not heat the shrink tubing too long as this may damage the
insulation coating.

Assembling the JG2 Terminal and Power Cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 297
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Bacnground
Figure 4-107 shows the components of a JG2 terminal and a power cable.

Figure 4-107 Components of a JG2 terminal and a power cable


A. Heat shrink B. JG2 terminal C. Insulation layer D. Conductor of a
tubing of a power cable power cable

Procedure
1. Strip a part of the insulation to expose the cable conductor with a length of L,
as shown in Figure 4-108. The recommended values of L are listed in Table
4-24.

Figure 4-108 Stripping a power cable (JG2 terminal)


NO TICE

● When you strip a power cable, do not damage the conductor of the cable.
● If the bare crimping terminal is not provided by Huawei, you can adjust the
value of L as required

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 298
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-24 Mapping between the cross-sectional area of the conductor and
the value of L
Cross-Sectional Area of Conductor Value of L (mm (in.))
(mm2 (in.2))

16 (0.025) 13 (0.51)

25 (0.039) 14 (0.55)

35 (0.054) 16 (0.63)

2. Put the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimping terminal, as shown in
Figure 4-109.

Figure 4-109 Putting the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimping terminal


3. Put the bare crimping terminal onto the exposed conductor, and ensure that
the bare crimping terminal is in good contact with the insulation of the power
cable, as shown in Figure 4-109.
4. Crimp the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the conductor, as
shown in Figure 4-110.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 299
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-110 Crimping the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the
conductor (JG2 terminal)


5. Push the heat shrink tubing toward the connector until the tube covers the
crimped part, and then use a heat gun to heat the tube, as shown in Figure
4-111.

Figure 4-111 Heating the heat shrink tubing (JG2 terminal)


Assembling the Cord End Terminal and Power Cable

Background
Figure 4-112 shows the components of a cord end terminal and a power cable.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 300
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-112 Components of a cord end terminal and a power cable


A. Cord end terminal B. Insulation layer of a C. Conductor of a power
power cable cable

Procedure
1. Strip a part of the insulation layer to expose the cable conductor with a
length of L1, as shown in Figure 4-113. Determine the value of L1 based on
the cross-sectional area of the cable conductor. The recommended values of
L1 are listed in Table 4-25.


NO TICE

When you strip a power cable, do not damage the conductor of the cable.

Figure 4-113 Stripping a power cable (cord end terminal)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 301
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-25 Mapping between the cross-sectional area of the conductor and
the value of L1
Cross- Value of L1 (mm Cross-Sectional Value of L1 (mm
Sectional (in.)) Area of (in.))
Area of Conductor (mm2
Conductor (in.2))
(mm2 (in.2))

1 8 10 15

1.5 10 16 15

2.5 10 25 18

4 12 35 19

6 14 50 26

2. Put the cord end terminal onto the exposed conductor and ensure that the
conductor is aligned with the edge of the cord end terminal, as shown in
Figure 4-114.


NO TICE

After the conductor is fed into the cord end terminal, the protruding part of
the conductor must not be longer than 1 mm (0.04 in.).

Figure 4-114 Putting the cord end terminal onto the conductor


3. Select a proper cross-sectional area, and crimp the joint parts of the cord end
terminal and the conductor, as shown in Figure 4-115.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 302
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-115 Crimping the joint parts of the cord end terminal and the
conductor


4. Check the maximum width of the crimped terminal. Table 4-26 lists the
maximum width of a crimped terminal.

Table 4-26 Maximum width of a crimped terminal

Cross-Sectional Area of the Maximum Width of the Crimped
Terminal (mm2) Terminal — W1 (mm(in.))

0.25 1

0.5 1

1.0 1.5

1.5 1.5

2.5 2.4

4 3.1

6 4

10 5.3

16 6

25 8.7

35 10



Installing Power Cables in a Dual-DC Connector

This section describes how to install power cables in a dual-DC connector.

Context

NO TE

Colors and structures of cables vary in different countries or regions. If cables are purchased
locally, they must comply with local rules and regulations.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 303
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-116 shows the components of a dual-DC connector.

Figure 4-116 Dual-DC connector appearance


(1) Connector body (2) Screw (3) Cover plate

(4) Wiring hole (5) Scale (6) Viewing window

Procedure
1. Trim power cables according to the scale on the connector, as shown in
Figure 4-117.


NO TICE

● Strip 18–23 mm off the outer jacket from the end.
● Ensure that the wires do not split during cable stripping.

NO TE

Cables applicable to dual-DC connectors shall have a cross-sectional area of 16–25
mm2.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 304
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-117 Trimming power cables


2. Rotate the cover plate until the screws are completely exposed, as shown in
the following figure.


3. Loosen the screws to open the crimping plate.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 305
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


4. Insert the positive wire into hole (+) and the negative wire into hole (–). After
the wires are properly inserted, secure them by tightening the screws.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 306
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

● Ensure that positive and negative wires are inserted into correct holes.
Otherwise, device malfunctions or personal injury can easily occur. Before
powering on the device, carefully check the polarities of power cables.
● Remove the connector from the device before inserting wires. This is
because inserting wires into a connector when the connector is still on the
device can cause serious consequences, such as sparking, fuse blowout,
and connector damage.
● After wires are inserted into the correct holes, use a Phillips screwdriver
with PH2 (φ5) head size to secure the wires with a torque of 1.6–1.9 N m.

5. Rotate the cover plate to completely cover the screws.

Figure 4-118 Rotating the cover plate


6. Check whether cable installation is qualified.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 307
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

● Power wires must be properly installed, as shown in Figure 4-119. If you
can see the internal copper wires when pulling the power cable, the
installation is unqualified, as shown in Figure 4-120.
● After tightening the screws, ensure that the cover plate is rotated to the
required position to completely cover the screws, as shown in Figure
4-121. Otherwise, the screws are still exposed to some extent, as shown in
Figure 4-122.
● You can check whether the copper wires have been tightly crimped via the
viewing window, as shown in Figure 4-123. If the outer jacket of the cable
can be seen via the viewing window, the cable installation is unqualified,
as shown in Figure 4-124 and Figure 4-125.

Figure 4-119 Qualified cable installation


Figure 4-120 Unqualified cable installation


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 308
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-121 Cover plate rotated to the required position


Figure 4-122 Cover plate not rotated to the required position


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 309
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-123 Qualified cable installation (seeing only copper wires from the
viewing window)


Figure 4-124 Unqualified cable installation (seeing both copper wires and
cable's outer jacket from the viewing window)


Figure 4-125 Unqualified cable installation (seeing only the cable's outer
jacket from the viewing window)


4.1.12.2.3 Assembling Ethernet Cables


Assembling the Shielded RJ45 Connector and Ethernet Cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 310
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Background

Figure 4-126 shows the components of an RJ45 connector and a shielded
Ethernet cable.

Figure 4-126 Shielded RJ45 connector and cable


A. Jacket of B. Metal shell of C. Wire holder of D. Plug of
connector connector connector connector

E. Jacket of F. Shield layer of G. Twisted-pair -
Ethernet cable Ethernet cable wires

Procedure
1. Fit the jacket of the connector onto the Ethernet cable, as shown in Figure
4-127.

Figure 4-127 Fitting the jacket of the connector onto the Ethernet cable


2. Remove a 30 mm (1.18 in.) long section of the jacket, cut off the nylon twine
inside the jacket, and cut a no more than 5 mm (0.20 in.) cleft in the jacket,
as shown in Figure 4-128.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 311
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-128 Removing the jacket of a twisted-pair cable (unit: mm (in.))


NO TICE

● When you remove a section of the jacket, do not damage the shield layer
of the twisted-pair cable.
● When you remove the shield layer, do not damage the insulation of the
twisted-pair cable.

3. Fit the metal shell onto the twisted-pair cable. The shield layer is covered by
the metal shell, as shown in Figure 4-129.

Figure 4-129 Fitting the metal shell onto the twisted-pair cable


4. Fit the metal shell onto the twisted-pair cable until the shield layer is covered
completely. Along the edge of the metal shell, cut off the aluminum foil shield
layer and ensure that there is no surplus copper wire. The exposed twisted-
pair cable is about 20 mm (0.79 in.) long, as shown in Figure 4-130.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 312
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-130 Removing the shield layer of a twisted-pair cable (unit: mm
(in.))


5. Lead the four pairs of twisted-pair wires through the wire holder, as shown in
Figure 4-131 and Figure 4-132. Ensure that the colored wires are in the
correct location in the cable.

Figure 4-131 Leading wires through the wire holder


Figure 4-132 Cable locations in a wire holder


6. Align the four pairs of cables in the holder, as shown in Figure 4-133. The
connections between the wires and the pins are shown in Figure 4-134 and
listed in Table 4-27.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 313
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-133 Four pairs of cables on a wire holder


Figure 4-134 Connections between wires and pins


Table 4-27 Connections between wires and pins (using a straight-through
cable as an example)

Matching Pins of Wires Wire Color

1 White-Orange

2 Orange

3 White-Green

4 Blue

5 White-Blue

6 Green

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 314
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Matching Pins of Wires Wire Color

7 White-Brown

8 Brown

7. Cut off the surplus cables along the lower edge of the wire holder, as shown
in Figure 4-135.

Figure 4-135 Cutting off surplus cables


8. Put the connector body onto the wire holder and turn the metal shell by 90°,
as shown in Figure 4-136.

Figure 4-136 Putting the connector body onto the wire holder


NO TE

Ensure that the wire holder is in good contact with the connector body.
9. Push the metal shell toward the connector body until the wire holder and the
connector body are engaged completely. Crimp the connector, as shown in
Figure 4-137.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 315
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-137 Crimping the connector


10. Push the jacket towards the metal shell until the metal shell is covered. This
completes the assembly of one end of the cable, as shown in Figure 4-138.

Figure 4-138 Pushing the metal shell


11. To complete the assembly of the other end, repeat steps 1 to 10.

Assembling an Unshielded RJ45 Connector and Ethernet Cable

Background
Figure 4-139 shows the components of an unshielded RJ45 connector and cable.

Figure 4-139 Components of an unshielded RJ45 connector and cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 316
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

A. Plug of connector B. Jacket C. Twisted-pair wires

Procedure
1. Remove a 16-mm (0.63 in.) long section of the jacket, as shown in Figure
4-140.


NO TICE

When you remove the shield layer, do not damage the insulation of the
twisted-pair cable.

Figure 4-140 Removing the jacket of a twisted-pair cable (unit: mm (in.))


2. Align the four pairs of wires and cut the ends neatly, as shown in Figure
4-141. The connections between the wires and the pins are listed in Table
4-28.

Figure 4-141 Connections between wires and pins (unit: mm (in.))


Table 4-28 Connections between wires and pins (using a straight-through
cable as an example)

Matching Pins of Wires Wire Color

1 White-Orange

2 Orange

3 White-Green

4 Blue

5 White-Blue

6 Green

7 White-Brown

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 317
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Matching Pins of Wires Wire Color

8 Brown

3. Feed the cable into the plug, and crimp the connector, as shown in Figure
4-142.

NO TE

When inserting the cable, check from the side or bore of the plug to ensure that the
cable is completely seated in the plug.

Figure 4-142 Crimping the connector


4. To complete the assembly of the other end, repeat steps 1 to 3.

Checking the Appearance of Contact Strips

Background
● To ensure proper contact between the crimped wires and the wire conductors,
the heights and sizes of the contact strips must be standard and the same.
● The contact strips must be parallel to each other, with an offset of less than ±
5°. The top margin of a strip must be parallel to the axis of the connector,
with an offset of less than ± 10°.
● To ensure conductivity, the surface of the contact strips must be clean.
● The contact strips must be in good contact with the RJ45 socket. The plastic
separators must remain intact and be aligned.
● The contact strip blade must extend beyond the ends of the wires. The ends
of the wires must be in contact with the edge of the RJ45. The distance
between them must be less than 0.5 mm (0.02 in.).

Procedure
1. Hold the crimped connector, with the front side facing you, and check
whether the contact strips are of the same height. The height should be 6.02
± 0.13 mm (0.237 ± 0.005). If a measuring tool is not available, you can
compare the connector with a standard connector. Figure 4-143 shows an
unqualified piece, and Figure 4-144 shows a qualified piece.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 318
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

All unqualified pieces must be crimped again.

Figure 4-143 Contact strips of different heights


Figure 4-144 Contact strips of the same height


2. Hold an RJ45 connector and turn it 45°. Observe the top edges of the metal
contact strips. Figure 4-145 shows an unqualified piece.

Figure 4-145 Unparallel contact strips of different heights


3. Check whether the contact strips are clean. If they are not clean and the dirt
cannot be removed, replace it with a new RJ45 connector. Figure 4-146 shows
an unqualified piece.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 319
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-146 Dirt on a contract strip


4. Check whether the contact strips and the plastic separators are well aligned
and intact. If a separator is skewed and cannot be fixed, replace it with a new
RJ45 connector. Figure 4-147 shows an unqualified piece.

Figure 4-147 Skewed plastic separators


5. Hold the connector with the side facing towards you, and check whether you
can see the cross-sections of the wires. Ensure that the ends of the wires are
in good contact with the edge of the RJ45, and that the contact strip blade
extends beyond the ends of the wires and is crimped with the wires. If not,
replace the connector. Figure 4-148 shows an unqualified piece.

Figure 4-148 Wires not in good contact with the edge of the RJ45


Testing the Connection of Assembled Cables

Background
Huawei provides two types of Ethernet cables: straight-through cables and
crossover cables.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 320
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Straight-through cables are connected in a one-to-one manner. They are used
to connect terminals such as a computer or switch to network devices. Table
Pin assignment of the straight-through cable connector lists the
connections of core wires in a straight-through cable.

Table 4-29 Pin assignment of the straight-through cable connector
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation
Pin Pin

X1.1 X2.1 White-orange Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White-green Twisted pair

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair

X1.5 X2.5 White-blue

X1.7 X2.7 White-brown Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

● Crossover cables are connected in a crossover manner. They are used to
connect terminals such as two computers or switches. Table Pin assignment
of the crossover cable connector lists the connections of core wires in a
crossover cable

Table 4-30 Pin assignment of the crossover cable connector
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation
Pin Pin

X1.1 X2.3 White-orange Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.6 Orange

X1.3 X2.1 White-green Twisted pair

X1.6 X2.2 Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair

X1.5 X2.5 White-blue

X1.7 X2.7 White-brown Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown


Figure 4-149 shows the pins of an RJ45 connector.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 321
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-149 Pins of an RJ45 connector


Procedure
1. Feed both connectors of the cable into the ports of the cable tester.
2. After the connectors are properly inserted, turn on the tester. If the indicators
from 1 to G turn on simultaneously, you can infer that the pins work normally
and the wires are correctly connected.

NO TE

Turn the switch to the S position to slow down lighting of the indicators so that you
can see the indicators more clearly, as shown in Figure 4-150.

Figure 4-150 Testing the conduction and connections of wires


3. Gently shake the connector and repeat Step 2 to check whether the metal
contact strips are in good contact with the core wires and Ethernet ports, as
shown in Figure 4-151.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 322
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-151 Checking the reliability


The procedure for testing a crossover cable is the same as that for testing a
straight-through cable except for the sequence in which the indicators turn
on, which depends on the wire connections of a crossover cable.

The Ethernet cable is qualified if the indicators turn on in the following
sequence:

At the master (left) section of the tester, the indicators turn on in the
sequence of 1-8-G. At the slave (right) section of the tester, the indicators
turn on in the sequence of 3-6-1-4-5-2-7-8-G.

If the indicators do not come on in this sequence, the Ethernet cable is
unqualified.

NO TE

If a tester is not available, you can use a multimeter to perform a simple test, as
shown in Figure 4-152.

Figure 4-152 Testing the connection of an Ethernet cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 323
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.1.12.2.4 Installing Cable Accessories

Precautions for Installing Cable Accessories

NO TE

The illustrations in this document may differ from actual situations, but the installation
methods are the same. For example, in this document, the adapters of cable connectors
have separate interfaces. In the actual situation, the adapters may have interfaces fixed on
equipment.

Tools
Use dedicated tools provided or specified by Huawei and follow the installation
procedure described here.

Bending Radius
Unless otherwise specified, bending radius (R) of cables or fibers must meet the
requirements listed in Table 4-31.

Table 4-31 Bending radius of cables or fibers
Cable or Fiber Bending Radius (R)

Ordinary cable In normal cases, R ≥ 2d. When the
cable is connected with a connector, R
≥ 5d.

Fiber Single-mode G.657A2 optical fiber: R ≥
10 mm (0.39 in.), bending angle > 90°
Multi-mode A1b optical fiber: 30 mm
(1.18 in.) ≤ R ≤ 40 mm (1.57 in.),
bending angle > 90°



NO TE

The letter d indicates the diameter of a cable or fiber.

Precautions for Installation
● Hold terminals of cables instead of pulling the cables themselves when
installing or removing cable components.
● Do not insert a connector forcibly when the connector is blocked. Use a
dedicated tool to pull out the connector. Install the connector again after you
check that the pins are inserted properly.
● Before tightening screws on cable connectors, ensure that the connectors are
properly connected to their adapters. Tighten the screw with appropriate force
using a flat-head or Phillips screwdriver instead of bare hands or an electric
screwdriver. If the screw cannot be screwed into the tapped hole, determine

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 324
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

the reason and try again. Do not apply too much force, or the screw or
adapter may be damaged.
● When removing densely aligned cables or fiber connectors, use dedicated
pliers such as cable-pulling pliers and fiber-pulling pliers.
● Do not twist, bend, stretch, or extrude fibers during installation.
● Cover the idle fiber connectors with dust caps. Remove the dust caps before
using the fiber connectors.

Requirements for Cable Routing
● To protect cables, remove the burrs in the cable through-holes or install
protective rings in the holes.
● To ease the connection and to avoid stress, keep cable joints slack. After
connecting multiple cables to a connector that has multiple interfaces, keep
the cables slack to avoid generating stress.
● Bind or clean cables gently because cable distortion affects signal quality.
● Keep cables away from moveable components such as doors.
● Sharp objects must not touch cable wiring to prevent damage to cables.
● To protect power cables, route power cables of the active and standby power
modules separately.

Installing Power Adapters


?.1. Installing the OT Terminal

This section describes how to install OT terminals on the terminals. You can install
one OT terminal or two OT terminals on one terminal.

Procedure
● Install an OT terminal.
a. Align the hole of the OT terminal (conductor upward) with a connecting
hole, as shown in Figure 4-153.

Figure 4-153 Aligning the OT terminal with a connecting hole


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 325
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

When you install an OT terminal, the crimping sleeve is installed as shown in
Figure 4-154, where A is correct and B is incorrect.

Figure 4-154 Installing an OT terminal, showing the orientation of
crimping sleeve


b. Place the spring washer and flat washer in turn, mount a matching screw,
and fasten it clockwise, as shown in Figure 4-155.

Figure 4-155 Installing two terminals back to back


NO TICE

Ensure that the OT terminal is not in contact with other terminals or
metal components.

c. Move the cable slightly and ensure that it is securely connected, as shown
in Figure 4-156.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 326
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-156 Installed OT terminal


● Install two OT terminals on a post.
Before you install two OT terminals on a post, ensure that the two terminals
can be installed on the post and that the electrical connecting pieces have a
large contact area. Two OT terminals can be installed using any of these
methods:
– Bend the upper OT terminal at a 45- or 90-degree angle, as shown in
Figure 4-157.
– Cross the two terminals, as shown in Figure 4-158.

Figure 4-157 Bending the upper OT terminal at a 45- or 90-degree angle


Figure 4-158 Crossing two terminals


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 327
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

If the two terminals are different sizes, place the smaller one above the bigger
one. A maximum of two terminals can be installed on a post.

● To remove an OT terminal, loosen the screw counterclockwise.

4.1.12.2.5 Installing Ethernet Adapters


Installing a Shielded Ethernet Connector

Procedure
1. Hold the male and female connectors, with the male connector facing the
female connector, as shown in Figure 4-159.

Figure 4-159 Holding the male and female shielded connectors


2. Insert the male connector into the female connector, as shown in Figure
4-160.

Figure 4-160 Feeding the male shielded connector into the female shielded
connector


3. When you hear a click, the cable connector is completely inserted in the port.
(The clip on the cable connector pops up to fix the connector in the port.) Pull
the connector slightly and ensure that it is securely connected, as shown in
Figure 4-161.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 328
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-161 Installed shielded Ethernet connector


4. To remove an Ethernet connector, press the locking key and pull out the
connector, as shown in Figure 4-162.

Figure 4-162 Removing a shielded Ethernet connector


Installing an Unshielded Ethernet Connector

Procedure
1. Hold the male and female connectors, with the male connector facing the
female connector, as shown in Figure 4-163.

Figure 4-163 Holding the male and female unshielded connectors


2. Feed the male connector into the female connector, as shown in Figure
4-164.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 329
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-164 Feeding the male connector into the female unshielded
connector


3. A crisp click indicates that the connector is locked by the locking key. Pull the
connector slightly and ensure that it is securely connected. Figure 4-165
shows an installed Ethernet connector.

Figure 4-165 Installed unshielded Ethernet connector


4. To remove an Ethernet connector, press the locking key and pull out the
connector, as shown in Figure 4-166.

Figure 4-166 Removing an unshielded Ethernet connector


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 330
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.1.12.2.6 Installing Fiber Connectors

NO TE

● After you remove the dustproof cap, ensure that the fiber pins are clean and install
them as soon as possible.
● When you disassemble fiber connectors, you must use a dedicated tool if the connectors
are densely installed. Do not pull fiber protection pipes to remove fiber connectors.

Installing an FC Fiber Connector

Procedure
1. Remove the dustproof cap of the FC connector and store it for future use.
2. Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector, as
shown in Figure 4-167.

Figure 4-167 Aligning the male connector with the female connector


3. Align the male connector with the female connector and gently push the
male connector until it is completely seated in the female connector, as
shown in Figure 4-168.

Figure 4-168 Feeding the male connector into the female connector


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 331
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4. Fasten the locking nut clockwise and ensure that the connector is securely
installed, as shown in Figure 4-169.

Figure 4-169 Fastening the locking nut


5. To disassemble an FC fiber connector, loosen the locking nut
counterclockwise, and gently pull the male connector, as shown in Figure
4-170.

Figure 4-170 Disassembling an FC fiber connector


Installing an LC Fiber Connector

Procedure
1. Remove the dustproof cap of the LC fiber connector and store it for future
use.
2. Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector, as
shown in Figure 4-171.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 332
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-171 Aligning the male connector with the female connector


3. Align the male connector with the fiber adapter and gently push the male
connector until it is completely seated in the fiber connector, as shown in
Figure 4-172.

Figure 4-172 Feeding the male connector into the female connector


4. A clicking sound indicates that the male connector is locked, as shown in
Figure 4-173.

Figure 4-173 Installed LC connector


5. To disassemble an LC fiber connector, press the locking nut to release the
locking clips from the bore, and gently pull the male connector, as shown in
Figure 4-174.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 333
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-174 Disassembling an LC fiber connector


Installing an SC Fiber Connector

Procedure
1. Remove the dustproof cap of the SC fiber connector and store it for future
use.
2. Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector, as
shown in Figure 4-175.

Figure 4-175 Aligning the male connector with the female connector


3. Feed the fiber connector into the female connector, with your fingers holding
the shell of the fiber connector (not the pigtail). When you hear a click, the
fiber connector is secured by the clips (internal parts, not illustrated in the
figure). Pull the fiber connector gently. If the connector does not loosen, the
installation is complete. As shown in Figure 4-176.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 334
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-176 Installed SC fiber connector


4. To disassemble an SC fiber connector, hold the shell of the connector (do not
hold the fiber) and gently pull the connector in the direction vertical to the
adapter. Unlock the male connector, and then separate it from the shell, as
shown in Figure 4-177.

Figure 4-177 Disassembling an SC fiber connector


NO TICE

During operation, pinch the housing instead of the tail.

Installing an MTRJ Fiber Connector

Procedure
1. Remove the dustproof cap of the MTRJ fiber connector and store it for future
use.
2. Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector,
make sure that the center PINs of the two connectors are on the same axis,
and the pins and card slots are in the same direction, as shown in Figure
4-178.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 335
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-178 Aligning the male connector with the female connector


3. Align the fiber adapter along the axis and gently push the fiber plug, as
shown in Figure 4-179.

Figure 4-179 Feeding the male connector into the female connector


4. When you hear a "click", it has been plugged into place. At this time, the
hook has popped up to lock the fiber plug. Pull gently without loosening, as
shown in Figure 4-180.

Figure 4-180 Installed MTRJ fiber connector


5. When disassembling, lightly press the button of the optical fiber plug to
disengage the hook from the slot, and gently pull the optical fiber plug
housing along the axis, and the disassembly is completed, as shown in Figure
4-181.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 336
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-181 Disassembling a MTRJ fiber connector


Installing an MPO Connector

Procedure
1. Remove the dustproof cap of the MPO fiber connector and store it for future
use.
2. Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector, as
shown in Figure 4-182.

Figure 4-182 Aligning the male connector with the female connector


3. Hold the shell labeled "PUSH" and feed the male connector into the female
connector until you hear a clicking sound. The male and female connectors
are securely installed, as shown in Figure 4-183.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 337
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-183 Installed MPO fiber connector


4. To disassemble an MPO fiber connector, hold the shell labeled "PULL" and
remove the male connector, as shown in Figure 4-184.

Figure 4-184 Disassembling an MPO fiber connector


4.1.12.2.7 Replacing the Mold of the Crimping Tool

Procedure
1. Hold the handles of a pair of COAX crimping tools. Loosen the two fastening
screws counterclockwise, as shown in Figure 4-185.

Figure 4-185 Loosening two fastening screws


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 338
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

2. Hold the handles of the COAX crimping tools to open the self-locking
mechanism. The jaw of the COAX crimping tools opens automatically, as
shown in Figure 4-186.

Figure 4-186 Pliers jaw opening automatically


3. Remove the mold from the COAX crimping tools, as shown in Figure 4-187.

Figure 4-187 Removing the mold from the COAX crimping tools


4. Place the mold to be installed into the jaw of the COAX crimping tools and
align the screw holes, as shown in Figure 4-188.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 339
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-188 Installing a new mold in the COAX crimping tool


NO TICE

Keep the short side of the mold inwards and the long side outwards, with the
teeth of the mold aligning from the larger size to the smaller size.

5. Hold the handles of the COAX crimping tools tightly to match the mold and
the jaw completely. Align the screw holes, as shown in Figure 4-189.

Figure 4-189 Aligning the screw holes


6. Hold the handles of the COAX crimping tools with one hand. Tighten the two
fastening screws clockwise. Figure 4-190 and Figure 4-191 shows the mold
installed in the COAX crimping tool.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 340
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-190 Mold installed in the COAX crimping tool


Figure 4-191 An installed mold


4.1.12.3 Equipment Grounding Specifications

4.1.12.3.1 General Grounding Specifications

Table 4-32 shows the general grounding specifications.

Table 4-32 General grounding specifications
No. Description

1 The working ground and protective ground, including the shielded
ground and the lightning-proof ground of the cable distribution frame
should share the same grounding conductor.

2 The cable trays, shells, metal ventilation pipes, metal doors and windows
in the equipment room should be grounded for protection.

3 The metal parts of the equipment which are electrically floating in
normal conditions should be grounded for protection.

4 The ground cable must be connected securely to the protective ground
bar of the equipment room.

5 Do not use other equipment as part of the ground cable or electrical
connection.



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 341
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.1.12.3.2 Grounding Specifications for Equipment Room

The grounding resistance of a comprehensive communication building should be
less than or equal to one ohm. The grounding resistance of an ordinary
communication office should be less than five ohms. The grounding resistance in
an area where the earth resistance rate is high should be less than 10 ohms.

4.1.12.3.3 Grounding Specifications for Devices

Table 4-33 lists the equipment grounding specifications.

Table 4-33 Equipment Grounding Specifications

No. Description

1 All communication devices and auxiliary devices (such as mobile base
stations, transmission and switching devices, power supply devices) in
the equipment room should be grounded for protection. Connect all
protective ground for various devices jointly to a general ground bar, and
then to the same protective ground bar in the room together with the
protective ground (PGND) of the device.

2 The PGND of the equipment is shorted to the copper ground bar
provided by the customer. The short-circuiting cable used should be a
yellow-green plastic insulated cable with a copper core and a cross-
sectional area greater than 25 sq. mm (0.039 sq. in.).

3 There are grounding terminals and grounding lugs at the lower part of
the front door, rear door and side panel of the cabinet, connected to the
grounding terminals of the cabinet framework through connection
cables with cross-sectional area of no less than 1.6 sq. mm (0.002 sq.
in.).

4 Ensure that all metal components of the cabinet conduct well. No
insulating coating should be sprayed on the connection part of the metal
components.

5 Connect the cabinets in the same row by fastening captive screws and
gaskets on the top of the cabinets. Do not spray any coating into a
rectangular area measuring 30 mm x 50 mm (1.18 in. x 1.97 in.) around
the connection hole for a captive bolt. Measures to prevent rust and
corrosion must be taken for this area. Zinc electroplating with iridescent
yellow chromate conversion coating should be applied to the gasket and
nut to ensure good electrical contact.

6 When combining cabinets of the same type, short-circuiting cables are
required to connect the ground busbars (if any) of the cabinets. The
cross-sectional area of the short-circuiting cable is 6 sq. mm (0.009 sq.
in.) and is no more than 300 mm (11.8 in.) long. Connect the two ends
of the short-circuiting cable to the ground busbar terminals of
neighboring cabinets and fix them firmly.



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 342
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.1.12.3.4 Grounding Specifications for Communications Power Supply

Table 4-34 shows the grounding specifications for communication power supplies.

Table 4-34 Grounding specifications for communication power supplies
No. Description

1 The inlet for the AC power cable at the equipment room should be
equipped with a surge protection device (C-level) with a nominal
discharge current no less than 20 kA.

2 The protective ground for the power supply and that for communication
equipment share the same grounding conductor. If the power supply and
the equipment are in the same equipment room, use the same
protective ground bar for them if possible.

3 Use a surge protection circuit on the AC power interface.

4 The positive of the -48 V DC power supply or negative pole of the 24 V
DC power supply should be grounded at the output of the DC power
supply.

5 The working ground and protective ground of the DC power supply
equipment should use the same grounding conductor with the protective
ground of the switching equipment. If the power supply and equipment
are in the same equipment room, use the same protection ground bar
for them if possible.

6 Add surge protection on the DC power interface.


4.1.12.3.5 Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables

Table 4-35 lists the grounding specifications for signal cables.

Table 4-35 Grounding specifications for signal cables
No. Description

1 Equip the cable outdoors with a metal jacket, well grounded at both
ends, or connect the ends of the metal jacket to the protective ground
bar of the equipment room. For cables inside the equipment room,
install surge protection devices at the interface to the equipment. The
PGND cable for the surge protection devices should be as short as
possible.

2 The incoming and outgoing signal cables to and from the office and
unused wires inside the cable should be grounded for protection.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 343
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

No. Description

3 The Tone & Data Access (TDA) cable must pass through the Main
Distribution Frame (MDF) with surge protective device (SPD) when
going out of the office. The cable's shield layer should be connected to
the protective ground of the MDF. The MDF should use the same
grounding conductor as the cabinet.

4 Do not route signal cables overhead.


4.1.12.3.6 Specifications for Laying Out Grounding Cables

Table 4-36 shows the specifications for the ground cable.

Table 4-36 Specifications for laying out ground cables
No. Description

1 The grounding wire should not run parallel to or twist around the signal
cable.

2 Bury ground underground or arrange them indoors. Do not route ground
cables overhead.

3 Do not connect two cables together to extend the PGND cable, or add
any switches or fuses.

4 The PGND cable should be an alternating yellow and green plastic
insulated one with a copper core.

5 The neutral line of the AC power cable cannot be connected to the
protective ground of transmission and communication equipment in the
equipment room.

6 A PGND cable should be as short as possible, with a length of no more
than 45 m (147.64 ft).


4.1.12.4 Engineering Labels for Cables

An engineering label serves as an identifier for on-site installation and
maintenance after the installation. Labels on the cables facilitate correct and
orderly connection of cables, and easy maintenance after installation.
Engineering labels are specialized for power cables and signal cables:
● Signal cables include network cables, optical fibers, and user cables.
● Power cables include the AC power cables and DC power cables.
NO TE

Fill in labels according to specified requirements to keep consistency of labels in the
equipment room. Make a relevant statement in the self-check report.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 344
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.1.12.4.1 Introduction to Labels

Label Materials

Features:
● Thickness: 0.09 mm (0.004 in.)
● Color: chalk white
● Material: polyester (PET)
● Ambient temperature: -29°C (-20.2°F) to +149°C (300.2°F)
● Printed by a laser printer and written with a marker
● Pass UL and CSA authentication

Type and Structure

Label for Signal Cables
The label for signal cables is L-shaped with fixed dimensions, as shown in Figure
4-192.

Figure 4-192 Label for signal cable


To specify more clearly the position of a cable, use the dividing lines on the label.
For example, there is a dividing line between the cabinet number and the chassis
number, and another one between the chassis number and the slot number. Each
dividing line is light blue (Pantone 656c) and 1.5 mm x 0.6 mm (0.06 in. x 0.02
in.).

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 345
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

The cut dotted line helps to fold the label when affixed to the cable, and its size is
1 mm x 2 mm (0.04 in. x 0.08 in.).

The word "TO:" (upside down in the figure) at the lower right corner of the label
is used to identify the opposite end of the cable on which the label is affixed.

Power Cable Label

The label for power cables should be attached to the identification plate on the
cable ties that are attached to the cable. The identification plate has an embossed
area 0.2 mm x 0.6 mm (0.008 in. x 0.02 in.) around (symmetric on both sides), and
the area in the middle is for affixing the label, as shown in Figure 4-193.

Figure 4-193 Power Cable Label


Label Printing

The contents can be printed or written on the labels. Printing is recommended for
the sake of high efficiency and eye-pleasant layout.

Template for Printing

You can obtain a template from the Huawei local office to print labels.

The template is made in Microsoft Word. Follow these instructions to use the
template:

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 346
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● You can modify the contents of the template. Do not change settings of
centered characters, direction, and fonts.
● If many characters need to be filled in, decrease the font size, but make sure
that the printouts are clear and legible.

Merging Cells in the Template

To merge two or more cells, do as follows:

1. Select Edit/Select All.
2. Select Format/Borders and Shading/Borders. Select Box tab and click OK.
3. Drag the mouse to select cells to be merged and select the Table/Merge
Cells.

Requirements on the Printer

To print labels, use a laser jet printer of any model. Before printing labels, set up
the page and try printing.

1. Try printing on ordinary paper with both sides blank. Place the blank paper
over the whole page of the label paper, and check whether the page setup
conforms to the label layout.
2. Make sure the printer properties, such as "paper size" and "direction", have
been set correctly.
– If the printout conforms to the sheet of labels, print the labels on the
label paper.
– If the printout does not conform, adjust the page setup and try printing
again until the correct printout is produced.

The method for adjusting the page setup is as follows.

1. Select File/Page Setup.
2. Select Layout and set Header and Footer as 0.
3. Select the Margins tab page. Select Left for Gutter Position and adjust the
values of Top, Bottom, Left, and Right.

NO TE

If the warning prompt as shown in Figure 4-194 appears before printing, click Ignore
to continue the printing.

Figure 4-194 Warning prompt before printing


After the page setup has been made correctly, save it for future use. This page
setup is only necessary the first time you use the template to print the labels.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 347
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Requirements for Feeding the Printer
The label paper consists of two layers and has undergone multiple processing
procedures such as printing and cutting. No matter what model of printer you use,
feed in the labels one page at a time. To avoid jamming the labels, never use the
auto-feed mode.
Feed in the label paper in the correct direction to ensure that the text is printed in
a correct position.

Requirements for the Printed Label
Make sure that the printed labels satisfy the following requirements:
● All the printouts must be on the label, and nothing should be printed on the
backing layer of the label page.
● Contents in the cells should be aligned in the center. In a single-line printout,
the dividing lines and the word "TO:" should not be covered by printed
characters.
● When the cells are merged and the printouts are made in multiple lines, avoid
covering the word "TO:" when printing the text. Use the space bar to move
the text to the next line.

Writing Labels

Writing Tools
To make sure the printouts are clear and legible, use black markers instead of
ball-point pens to write the labels.
If no marker is available, black ball-point pens are allowed, although not
recommended. Compared with ball-point pens, waterproof markers are better.
When writing with a ball-point pen, do not leave the oil on the label, which may
contaminate the label and blur the words.

NO TE

The delivered marker has two nibs. Use the smaller nib to write the labels.

Font
For the sake of legibility, use standard block letters and numbers as shown in
Table 4-37.

Table 4-37 Standard typeface for handwriting
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 A B C D E F G H

I J K L M N O P Q

R S T U V W X Y Z



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 348
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Determine the size of characters based on the number of letters or digits and
ensure that the characters are distinct and tidy.

Placement of text on a label is shown in Figure 4-195.

Figure 4-195 Placement of text on a label


Attaching Labels

After printing or writing the label, remove the label from the page and attach it to
the signal cable, or the identification plate of the power cable. The methods for
attaching labels are described in the following sections.

Label for Signal Cables
● Choose the place to attach labels.
The label is attached 2 cm (0.79 in.) from the connector on a signal cable. In
special cases (for example, to avoid cable bending or affecting other cables),
other positions are allowed to attach the labels. The rectangular part with
text is attached facing right or downward, as shown in Figure 4-196. The
details are as follows:
– The identification card is to the right of the cable in vertical cabling.
– The identification card should be downward when you lay out the cable
horizontally.

Figure 4-196 Text area of the label


● Procedure for attaching labels
Figure 4-197 shows the methods and procedures for attaching labels.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 349
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-197 Label for signal cables


Power Cable Label
Remove the label from the backing page, and attach it to the identification plate
on the cable tie. The label should be attached to the rectangular flute on the
identification plate, and attached to only one side of the identification plate. In an
equipment room, all labels should be attached in the same way. The cable ties are
bundled at 2 cm (0.79 in.) from the connectors, and other positions are allowed in
special circumstances.
Cable ties should be bound on both ends of a cable. After the bundling, the
finished identification plate should be on top of the cable in horizontal cabling, or
on the right side of the cable in vertical cabling, as shown in Figure 4-198. The
details are as follows:
● The identification card is to the right of the cable in vertical cabling.
● The identification card is on the top of the cable in horizontal cabling. Make
sure that the label is facing out.

Figure 4-198 Binding the label for the power cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 350
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Contents of Engineering Labels

Contents of Labels for Power Cables
Labels for power cables are affixed on only one side of the identification plates.
On the labels, there is information (the part after the word "TO:") about the
location of the device on the other end of the cable, like the location of control
cabinet, distribution box or power socket.

Contents of Labels for Signal Cables
The two sides of the label affixed on the signal cable carry information about the
location of the ports connected to both ends of the cable. Figure 4-199 shows the
information on both sides of the labels affixed to the signal cables.
● Area 1 contains the location information of the local end of the cable.
● Area 2 (with the word "TO:") contains the location information of the
opposite end of the cable.
● Area 3 has been folded up inside the label.

Figure 4-199 Printed parts on the label for signal cables


Seen from the cabling end of the equipment, the text part of the label is on the
right side of the cable. The side with "TO:" that is facing outside carries the
location information of the opposite end; and the other side carries the location
information of the local end.
In other words, the information in Area 1 at one end is the same as the
information in Area 2 at the other end of the cable.

Precautions for Using Engineering Labels

When using labels, pay attention to the following points:
● When printing, writing, or attaching labels, keep the labels clean.
● Since the label paper is made of moistureproof material, ink-jet printers and
ink pens cannot be used to print and write labels.
● Labels should be attached neatly. New-type labels are L-shaped. If they are
pasted at incorrect locations or in the incorrect direction, the appearance of
the device is affected.
● Power cable ties should be attached in the same positions on power cables,
with identification plates on the same side.
● The positions of "up", "down", "left" or "right" are all based on the viewpoint
of the engineering person who is working on the label.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 351
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.1.12.4.2 Engineering Labels for Optical Fibers

These labels are affixed to the optical fibers that connect the optical interfaces on
the boards in a chassis, or on the device boxes. There are two types of labels for
optical cables:
● One is for the fiber that connects the optical interfaces on two devices.
● The other is for the fiber that connects the device and the ODF.

Labels for the Optical Fibers Connecting Devices

Meaning of the Label
Table 4-38 lists information on both sides of the labels affixed to the optical fibers
that connect two devices.

Table 4-38 Information on labels affixed to the fibers between two devices
Content Meaning Example

MN-B-C-D- MN: cabinet M: The cabinet rows from front to back are
R/T number numbered from A to Z.
N: The cabinet columns from left to right are
numbered from 01 to 99.
For example, A01 is the cabinet in row A and
column 01.

B: chassis Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits,
number for example, 01.

C: physical Numbered in top-down and left-right order
slot number starting from 01. For example, 01 is the first slot
at the top left of the chassis.

D: optical Numbered in top-down and left-right order,
interface consistent with the port sequence number on
number. the device.

R: Receiving -
interface
T: optical
transmitting
interface


Example of the Label
Figure 4-200 shows a sample label on an optical fiber.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 352
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-200 Sample label on an optical fiber between two devices


The meaning of the label is listed in Figure 4-200.
● "A01-01-05-01-R" indicates that the local end of the optical fiber is connected
to the optical receiving interface 01 in slot 5, chassis 01 in the cabinet in row
A, column 01 in the machine room.
● "G01-01-01-01-T" indicates that the opposite end of the optical fiber is
connected with optical transmitting interface 01 in slot 01, chassis 01 in the
cabinet in row G, column 01 in the machine room.

Labels for the Optical Fibers Connecting the Device and an ODF

Meaning of the Labels
Table 4-39 shows information on both sides of labels attached to an optical fiber
between a device and an optical distribution frame (ODF).

Table 4-39 Information on labels affixed to a fiber between a device and an ODF
Content Meaning Example

MN-B-C-D- MN: cabinet For example, A01.
R/T number

B: chassis Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits,
number for example, 01.

C: physical slot Numbered in top-down and left-right order
number starting from 01. For example, 01 is the first
slot at the top left of the chassis.

D: optical Numbered in top-down and left-right order,
interface consistent with the port sequence number on
number. the device.

R: Optical -
receiving
interface
T: optical
transmitting
interface


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 353
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Content Meaning Example

ODF-MN-B- MN: row M: The cabinet rows from front to back are
C-R/T number and numbered from A to Z.
column N: The cabinet columns from left to right are
number of an numbered from 01 to 99.
ODF
For example, G01 is the ODF of row G and
column 01.

B: row number Range from 01 to 99, for example, 01-01.
of the terminal
device

C: column
number of the
terminal
device

R: Optical -
receiving
interface
T: optical
transmitting
interface


Example of the Label
Figure 4-201 shows a sample label on an optical fiber.

Figure 4-201 Sample label on an optical fiber between the device and the ODF


Meaning of the label in Figure 4-201:
● "ODF-G01-01-01-R" indicates that the local end of the optical fiber is
connected to the optical receiving terminal in row 01, column 01 of the ODF
in row G, column 01 in the machine room.
● "A01-01-05-01-R" indicates that the opposite end of the optical fiber is
connected to optical receiving interface 1 in slot 05, chassis 01 in the cabinet
in row A, column 01 in the machine room.

4.1.12.4.3 Engineering Labels for Network Cables


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 354
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Applicable Ranges
The labels can be applied to Ethernet cables.

Label Content
Table 4-40 shows the information on both sides of the labels affixed to Ethernet
cables.
You can also decide the label content based on the actual environment. If the
device is not installed in the cabinet, for example, you can remove the cabinet
number.

Table 4-40 Information on the Ethernet cables
Content Meaning Example

MN-B-C-D MN: cabinet For example, A01 is the first cabinet in row A.
number

B: chassis Numbered in bottom-up order with two
number digits, for example, 01.

C: physical slot Numbered with two digits in top-down and
number left-right order. For example, 01.

D: network port Numbered in top-down and left-right orders.
number For example, 01.

MN-Z MN: cabinet For example, B02 is the second cabinet in
number row B.

Z: Location Fill in the location number of the terminal
number device on site. If the cable is connected to a
device in a cabinet, specify the serial
numbers of the cabinet, the chassis, and the
Ethernet interface of the device. For example,
B02-03-12. If the cable is connected to the
Network Management Station (NMS),
specify the specific location of the NMS.


The contents of the labels for network cables connecting hubs and devices or
agents and the network cables for other purposes should be specified according to
actual connections. The details are as follows:
● For a network cable connecting a hub and device, the label on the hub end
should indicate the numbers of the chassis and cabinet where the hub resides,
and the serial number on the hub. The label on the device end should indicate
the number of the chassis and cabinet where the device is located. If the
device is a standalone device, provide the specific position of the device.
● For a network cable connecting a hub and an agent or terminal, the label on
the agent or terminal end should contain the serial number of the network
interface. The definitions of the cabinet number and chassis number are the
same as those described in Table 1-28.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 355
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● If the hub is a standalone device without a cabinet or chassis, the label should
contain specific location information that identifies the hub.

The serial number on the hub, the network interface number of the agent or
terminal, and the location of the standalone device should be specified according
to actual connections.

Label Example

Figure 4-202 shows a sample label on an Ethernet cable.

Figure 4-202 Sample label on an Ethernet cable


Meaning of the label in Figure 4-202:

● "A01-03-01-01" indicates that one end of the network cable is connected to
network interface 01 in slot 01, chassis 03 of the cabinet in row A, column 01
in the equipment room.
● "B02-03-01" indicates that another end of the network cable is connected to
network interface 01 in chassis 03 of the cabinet on row B, column 02 in the
equipment room. No slot number is given.

4.1.12.4.4 Engineering Labels for User Cables

Attach labels to both ends of a user cable to indicate the locations of the cable on
the device and main distribution frame (MDF).

Meaning of the Engineering Labels for User Cables

Table 4-41 shows the contents of the labels.

Table 4-41 Contents of the engineering labels for user cables

Content Meaning Example

MN-B-C-D MN: cabinet For example, A01 is the first cabinet in row A.
number

B: frame Numbered in the bottom-up order with two
number digits, for example, 03.

C: physical slot Numbered with two digits in top-down and
number left-right order. For example, 01.

D: cable Numbered with two digits in top-down and
number left-right order. For example, 01.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 356
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Content Meaning Example

MDF-MN-B-C MN: row M: The rows of cabinets from front to back
number and are numbered from A to Z. N: The columns of
column number cabinets from left to right are numbered
of the MDF from 01 to 99. For example, G01 is the MDF
of Row G and Column 01.

B: row number Ranges from 01 to 99, for example, 01-01.
of the terminal
device

C: column
number of the
terminal device



Example of the Label

Figure 4-203 shows a sample label on a user cable.

Figure 4-203 Sample label on a user cable


The meaning of the label in Figure 4-203 is as follows:

● "A01-03-01-01" indicates that the local end of the user cable is connected to
port 1 in slot 1, chassis 03 of the cabinet in row A, column 01 in the
equipment room.
● "MDF-G01-01-01" indicates that the opposite end of the user cable is
connected to the terminal in row 01, column 01 of the MDF in row G, column
01 in the equipment room.

4.1.12.4.5 Engineering Labels for Power Cables


Engineering Labels for DC Power Cables

These labels are affixed to the DC power cables that provide power supply for
cabinets, including the -48 V, PGND, and BGND cables. Here, the DC power cables
also include power cables and PGND cables.

The labels for DC power cables are affixed to one side of the identification plates
on cable ties. For details of the labels, see Table 4-42.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 357
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-42 Contents of the label

Content Meaning

MN(BC)- MN(BC): BC is written right under MN.
B--48Vn B: chassis number, numbered in bottom-up order with two
digits, for example, 01.
MN(BC)-B-
BGND n: power socket number, numbered as 1 to 3 in the bottom-
up and left-to-right orders.
MN(BC)-B- On the loaded cabinet side, only MN is used to identify the
PGND cabinet.
On the power cabinet side, MN identifies the row and column
number of the power distribution equipment like a control
cabinet and distribution box, and BC identifies the row and
column number of the -48 V connector. If there is no row
number or column number, or the connector can be identified
without them, BC can be omitted. It is unnecessary to identify
the row and column number for BGND and PGND.



The label only carries location information about the destination direction of the
power cable whereas information about the local end is unnecessary. That is, the
label only carries location information about the opposite equipment, the control
cabinet, or the distribution box. Table 1-30 lists the information on two -48 V
power supplies on the label. The information on other DC voltages, such as 24 V
and 60 V should be given in similar methods.

Make sure that labels are affixed in the correct direction. That is, after the cable
ties are bundled onto the cable, the identification plates with the labels should
face up, and the text on the labels in the same cabinet should be in the same
direction. For details, see Figure 4-204.

Figure 4-204 Example of the labels for DC power cables


The meaning of the label in Figure 4-204 is as follows:

● On the loaded cabinet side, the label "A01/B08--48V2" on the cable indicates
that the cable is -48 V DC supply, which is from the eighth connector in row B
of -48 V bus bar in the cabinet in row A, and column 1 in the equipment
room.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 358
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 F2A Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● On the distribution box side, the label "B03--48V2" indicates that the cable is
-48 V DC supply, connected to DC power socket 2 in row B, column 03 in the
equipment room.

NO TE

In the power distribution box or the first power cabinet of a row in a transmission
equipment room, every terminal block on the -48 V connector bar has a numeric
identification. For example, in the above label of "A01/B08--48V2", "08" (or sometimes "8")
is the numeric identification of the terminal block.
PGND and BGND are two copper bars, on which the terminal blocks are short-
circuited. Therefore, it makes no difference which terminal is connected to them. It
is only necessary to give the row and column of the power distribution box,
instead of giving the specific serial number of the terminal block on the copper
bar. For example, if the label on the loaded cabinet side is "A01-BGND", it means
that the power cable is a BGND that connects BGND copper bar in the power
distribution box in row A, column 01 in the machine room. Information on the
labels for PGND cables should be given in a similar way.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 359